Intel Stereo System AC450NX User Manual
AC450NX Rack Server System  
Product Guide  
Order Number: 702026-003  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Reference and Conventions  
For translated warnings, see Appendix C, “Warnings”  
Part I: User’s Guide  
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running  
4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run  
6 SCSI Configuration Utility  
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping  
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping  
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide  
Safety Guidelines  
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing  
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description  
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing  
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages  
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
A Regulatory Specifications  
B Equipment Log  
C Warnings  
Conventions  
WARNING  
WARNING indicates a hazard that can cause personal injury or  
equipment damage if the hazard is not avoided.  
CAUTION  
CAUTION indicates a hazard that might cause personal injury, damage to  
hardware, or software if the hazard is not avoided.  
NOTE  
✏
Notes provide information and may be used to emphasize a recommended  
sequence of steps.  
<F1>  
A letter, number, symbol, or word enclosed in < > represents a key on your keyboard.  
For example, the instruction "press <F1>" means press the key labeled "F1" on your  
keyboard.  
<Enter>  
The <Enter> key is used to enter commands and responses to prompts. Some manuals  
refer to <Enter> as RETURN, CARRIAGE RETURN, <CR>, or use an arrow. All of  
these terms are interchangeable.  
<x + y>  
_L  
Two or three key names, separated by plus signs, indicate multiple-key entries. For  
example, <Ctrl + Alt + Del> means hold down <Ctrl> and <Alt> and press <Del>.  
In all tables in this guide, active-low signal names have an “_L” symbol following the  
name; for example, DSTBN3_L. Active-high signal names do not have a “_L” suffix.  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Quick Reference and Conventions  
For translated warnings, see Appendix C, “Warnings”.......................................................... iii  
Part I: User’s Guide............................................................................................................. iii  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide...................................................................................... iii  
Conventions .........................................................................................................................iv  
Part I: User’s Guide  
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
Server Features.................................................................................................................. 18  
Chassis .............................................................................................................................. 21  
Controls and Indicators....................................................................................................... 24  
Server Security................................................................................................................... 26  
Password Protection.................................................................................................. 26  
Secure Boot Mode..................................................................................................... 26  
Boot Sequence Control.............................................................................................. 26  
Boot Without Keyboard.............................................................................................. 27  
Locked Power and Reset Switches............................................................................ 27  
Diskette Write Protect................................................................................................ 27  
Video Blanking........................................................................................................... 27  
Emergency Management Port (EMP) ........................................................................ 27  
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
Selecting a Site .................................................................................................................. 29  
Physical Specifications....................................................................................................... 30  
Environmental Specifications.............................................................................................. 30  
After Unpacking the Server ................................................................................................ 31  
Connecting Peripheral Devices .......................................................................................... 31  
Obtaining a Power Cord Set............................................................................................... 33  
Turning on Your Server ...................................................................................................... 33  
Power-on Self Test .................................................................................................... 35  
Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD ......................................................... 36  
Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes...................................................................... 37  
Installing Video Drivers....................................................................................................... 37  
Installing SCSI Drivers........................................................................................................ 37  
Server Won’t Boot From the CD......................................................................................... 38  
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running  
Power-on Self Test (POST)................................................................................................ 41  
4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility................................................................................... 43  
Running the Setup Utility ........................................................................................... 43  
Main Menu................................................................................................................. 45  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Advanced Menu......................................................................................................... 47  
Security Menu............................................................................................................ 51  
Server Menu.............................................................................................................. 52  
Boot Menu ................................................................................................................. 54  
Exit Menu Selections ................................................................................................. 55  
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run  
When to Run the System Setup Utility................................................................................ 57  
What You Need to Do ........................................................................................................ 58  
Running the SSU................................................................................................................ 58  
Starting the SSU........................................................................................................ 59  
Customizing the SSU................................................................................................. 60  
Launching a Task ...................................................................................................... 60  
Resource Configuration Add-in (RCA) Window.......................................................... 61  
Multiboot Add-in......................................................................................................... 67  
Security Add-in .......................................................................................................... 68  
System Event Log Manager Add-in ........................................................................... 70  
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In............................................................. 71  
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager ..................................................................... 73  
Exiting the SSU.......................................................................................................... 74  
6 SCSI Configuration Utility  
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
How EMP Console Works .................................................................................................. 78  
Requirements..................................................................................................................... 80  
Setting Up the Server for the EMP ..................................................................................... 81  
Server Menu.............................................................................................................. 81  
Console Redirection Submenu .................................................................................. 81  
Main EMP Console Window ............................................................................................... 82  
Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 82  
Status Bar.................................................................................................................. 82  
EMP Console Main Menu .......................................................................................... 83  
Server Control Operations.................................................................................................. 84  
Connect .................................................................................................................... 84  
Power On/Off............................................................................................................. 85  
Reset ........................................................................................................................ 86  
Phonebook......................................................................................................................... 87  
FRU Viewer ............................................................................................................... 88  
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility .............................................................................. 89  
What You Need to Do ........................................................................................................ 89  
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility ............................................................................. 90  
Command Line Format.............................................................................................. 90  
Parsing the Command Line ....................................................................................... 90  
Displaying Usage Information.................................................................................... 90  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Displaying a Given Area ............................................................................................ 92  
Using Specified CFG File........................................................................................... 95  
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping  
Tools and Supplies You Need ............................................................................................ 97  
Equipment Log .......................................................................................................... 97  
Hot-Swapping a Fan........................................................................................................... 98  
Removing a Fan ........................................................................................................ 98  
Replacing a Fan....................................................................................................... 100  
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping  
Hot-docking Bays ............................................................................................................. 101  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 101  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 101  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives............................................................................................. 102  
Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier................................................. 102  
Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-docking Bay................................... 104  
Hot-swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive............................................................. 106  
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 109  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 109  
Hot Swapping a Power Supply ......................................................................................... 110  
Removing a Power Supply....................................................................................... 110  
Replacing a Power Supply....................................................................................... 112  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide  
Safety Guidelines  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 115  
Server Precautions .................................................................................................. 115  
Equipment Rack Precautions................................................................................... 116  
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 119  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 119  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 119  
Covers.............................................................................................................................. 119  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover........................................................................ 120  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Cover...................................................................... 120  
Removing the Front Bezel ....................................................................................... 121  
Reinstalling the Front Bezel..................................................................................... 121  
Removing the Top Cover......................................................................................... 121  
Reinstalling the Top Cover....................................................................................... 123  
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ................................................................... 123  
Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover................................................................. 124  
Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover ............................................................... 125  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover............................................................. 125  
Removing the Memory Module Cover...................................................................... 125  
Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover ................................................................... 126  
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 127  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 127  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 127  
Fan Array Housing ........................................................................................................... 128  
Removing the Fan Array Housing............................................................................ 128  
Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing.......................................................................... 128  
LCD Module ..................................................................................................................... 131  
Removing the LCD Module...................................................................................... 131  
Reinstalling the LCD Module.................................................................................... 131  
Memory Modules.............................................................................................................. 132  
Removing a Memory Module................................................................................... 132  
Reinstalling a Memory Module................................................................................. 133  
Front Side Bus Terminator Module................................................................................... 135  
Removing a Terminator Module............................................................................... 135  
Reinstalling a Terminator Module ............................................................................ 135  
Processor......................................................................................................................... 137  
Removing a Processor ............................................................................................ 137  
Installing a Processor .............................................................................................. 137  
DC to DC Converter VRM ................................................................................................ 138  
Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM.................................................................... 138  
Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM...................................................................... 138  
CPU Tray ......................................................................................................................... 140  
Removing the CPU Tray.......................................................................................... 140  
Reinstalling the CPU Tray........................................................................................ 140  
Front Panel Board ............................................................................................................ 142  
Removing the Front Panel Board............................................................................. 142  
Reinstalling the Front Panel Board .......................................................................... 143  
CPU Baseboard ............................................................................................................... 144  
Removing the CPU Baseboard................................................................................ 144  
Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard.............................................................................. 144  
Add-in Boards................................................................................................................... 146  
Installing an Add-in Board........................................................................................ 146  
Removing an Add-in Board...................................................................................... 149  
I/O Riser Card .................................................................................................................. 150  
Removing the I/O Riser Card................................................................................... 150  
Reinstalling the I/O Riser Card ................................................................................ 150  
I/O Tray............................................................................................................................ 152  
Removing the I/O Tray............................................................................................. 152  
Reinstalling the I/O Tray .......................................................................................... 152  
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board......................................................... 154  
Removing the ICMB Board ...................................................................................... 154  
Reinstalling the ICMB Board.................................................................................... 154  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
PHP I/O Baseboard.......................................................................................................... 156  
Removing the PHP I/O Baseboard .......................................................................... 156  
Reinstalling the PHP I/O Baseboard........................................................................ 156  
MidPlane .......................................................................................................................... 158  
Removing the Midplane ........................................................................................... 158  
Reinstalling the Midplane......................................................................................... 158  
AC Filter and Cable.......................................................................................................... 158  
Removing the AC Filter and Cable........................................................................... 158  
Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable ........................................................................ 159  
Peripheral Bay.................................................................................................................. 159  
Removing the Peripheral Bay .................................................................................. 159  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay................................................................................ 159  
Peripheral Bay Backplane ................................................................................................ 160  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane................................................................. 160  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane............................................................... 161  
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board....................................................................................... 162  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board ....................................................... 162  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board..................................................... 162  
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 165  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 165  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 165  
Diskette Drive................................................................................................................... 165  
Removing the Diskette Drive ................................................................................... 166  
Replacing the Diskette Drive.................................................................................... 166  
CD-ROM Drive ................................................................................................................. 168  
Removing the CD-ROM Drive.................................................................................. 168  
Replacing the CD-ROM Drive.................................................................................. 170  
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 171  
Midplane Features............................................................................................................ 171  
2
I C Bus .................................................................................................................. 171  
Detection Signals..................................................................................................... 172  
5 V Quick Discharge................................................................................................ 172  
Midplane Connectors........................................................................................................ 173  
Grand Connector ..................................................................................................... 174  
Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector J2..................................................... 177  
Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5..................................................... 178  
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7................................................... 179  
Power Supply Connectors J8, J9, & J10.................................................................. 181  
Peripheral Power Connector J11 ............................................................................. 181  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 183  
Peripheral Bay Backplane ................................................................................................ 183  
SCSI ID Configurations............................................................................................ 184  
Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors ............................................................................. 184  
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 185  
PHP Input/Output (I/O) Baseboard Features.................................................................... 185  
32-bit PCI Expansion Slots ...................................................................................... 186  
64-bit PCI Hot-plug Expansion Slots........................................................................ 186  
ISA Expansion Slot.................................................................................................. 186  
PCI Video Controller................................................................................................ 187  
Symbios 53C896 SCSI Controller............................................................................ 190  
IDE Controller.......................................................................................................... 190  
Server Management (SM) ....................................................................................... 190  
I/O Riser Card.......................................................................................................... 192  
PHP I/O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers ..................................................................... 193  
Restoring CMOS to Default Values.......................................................................... 194  
Clearing the Password............................................................................................. 195  
Updating the BIOS................................................................................................... 195  
Updating BMC, FPC, and HCS Firmware ................................................................ 198  
Boot Sequence................................................................................................................. 199  
PHP I/O Baseboard Layout .............................................................................................. 200  
PHP I/O Baseboard Connectors....................................................................................... 201  
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section ............................................................... 201  
Expander Bus Connector: Power Section............................................................... 204  
32-bit PCI Connector ............................................................................................... 205  
64-bit PCI Connector ............................................................................................... 206  
ISA Connector ......................................................................................................... 207  
Diskette Drive Port................................................................................................... 208  
Wide/Fast 16-bit SCSI Port...................................................................................... 209  
IDE Port .................................................................................................................. 210  
I2C Feature Connector............................................................................................. 210  
I2C Connector.......................................................................................................... 211  
Front Panel Connector............................................................................................. 211  
Legacy Connector.................................................................................................... 212  
USB Port.................................................................................................................. 212  
Keyboard and Mouse Ports ..................................................................................... 213  
Serial Ports.............................................................................................................. 213  
Parallel Port............................................................................................................. 214  
ICMB Connectors .................................................................................................... 214  
VGA Video Port ....................................................................................................... 215  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 217  
CPU Baseboard Features ................................................................................................ 217  
Processors............................................................................................................... 217  
Memory Interface..................................................................................................... 218  
DC-to-DC Voltage Converters ................................................................................. 218  
I/O Interface............................................................................................................. 219  
Front Side Bus......................................................................................................... 219  
Front Side Bus Terminator Module .......................................................................... 219  
CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers........................................................................... 220  
Changing a Jumper Setting ..................................................................................... 221  
CPU Baseboard Layout.................................................................................................... 222  
CPU Baseboard Connectors ............................................................................................ 223  
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20:Rows A, B, and C .............................................. 223  
I/O Connector .......................................................................................................... 226  
Power Connectors ................................................................................................... 229  
Front Panel Connector............................................................................................. 230  
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 233  
Module Features .............................................................................................................. 233  
EDO DRAM Array ............................................................................................................ 234  
Memory Module Layout.................................................................................................... 239  
Installing DIMMs............................................................................................................... 240  
Removing DIMMs............................................................................................................. 242  
System Management Interface......................................................................................... 243  
Memory Module Connector .............................................................................................. 244  
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 249  
AC Input Power ................................................................................................................ 249  
Jumper JP1 Installing/Removing.............................................................................. 250  
Power System .................................................................................................................. 251  
Power Supply Input Voltages................................................................................... 252  
Power Supply Output Voltages................................................................................ 252  
Server Current Usage ...................................................................................................... 253  
Calculating Power Usage ................................................................................................. 254  
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 257  
Tools and Supplies You Need .......................................................................................... 257  
Equipment Log ........................................................................................................ 257  
Back-up Battery................................................................................................................ 258  
Replacing the Back-up Battery ................................................................................ 259  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 261  
Resetting the Server......................................................................................................... 261  
Initial Startup of the Server............................................................................................... 262  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 262  
Running New Application Software................................................................................... 263  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 263  
After the Server Has Been Running Correctly .................................................................. 263  
Checklist.................................................................................................................. 263  
More Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................................... 264  
Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing ............................................................ 264  
Monitoring POST ..................................................................................................... 264  
Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights....................................................... 265  
Confirming Loading of the Operating System .......................................................... 265  
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions........................................................................ 265  
Power Light Does Not Light ..................................................................................... 266  
Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly .......................................................... 266  
No Characters Appear on Screen............................................................................ 267  
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect ...................................................................... 267  
Incorrect or no Beep Codes..................................................................................... 267  
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light............................................................. 268  
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light .......................................................... 268  
Problems With Application Software........................................................................ 269  
Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down.................................................. 269  
Error Codes and Messages.............................................................................................. 269  
Port 80h Codes........................................................................................................ 270  
POST Error Codes and Messages........................................................................... 273  
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 277  
Front Panel Board ............................................................................................................ 277  
Fan Speed Control Voltage...................................................................................... 278  
Speaker............................................................................................................................ 278  
I2C Bus .................................................................................................................. 278  
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
Warnings and Cautions .................................................................................................... 279  
Features........................................................................................................................... 279  
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors.............................................................................. 279  
Blind Mate Connector J1 .................................................................................................. 280  
Power Connector J2......................................................................................................... 281  
Diskette Connector J3...................................................................................................... 281  
IDE Connector J4............................................................................................................. 282  
Wide SCSI Connector J5.................................................................................................. 283  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
A Regulatory Specifications  
Declaration of Compliance ............................................................................................... 285  
Safety Compliance ........................................................................................................... 285  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) ............................................................................... 285  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice (USA) ............................................................ 286  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices (International) .............................................. 286  
B Equipment Log  
Equipment Log ................................................................................................................. 287  
C Warnings  
WARNING: English (US)................................................................................................. 290  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français........................................................................................... 292  
WARNUNG: Deutsch ...................................................................................................... 294  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano................................................................................................... 296  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español.............................................................................................. 298  
Index  
Figures  
1-1.  
1-2.  
1-3.  
1-4.  
1-5.  
2-1.  
2-2.  
2-3.  
2-4.  
2-5.  
5-1.  
5-2.  
5-3.  
5-4.  
5-5.  
5-6.  
5-7.  
5-8.  
5-9.  
High-performance Server........................................................................................ 17  
Chassis, Board Set ................................................................................................. 21  
Chassis, Front View................................................................................................ 22  
Chassis, Rear View................................................................................................. 23  
Server Controls and Indicators................................................................................ 25  
Server I/O Connections........................................................................................... 32  
Server Power and Reset Switches.......................................................................... 34  
CD-ROM Drive........................................................................................................ 36  
Boot Menu .............................................................................................................. 38  
CD-ROM Boot Menu............................................................................................... 38  
System Setup Utility Main Window.......................................................................... 61  
RCA Window .......................................................................................................... 62  
Define ISA Window................................................................................................. 63  
Configuration Window............................................................................................. 65  
System Resource Usage Window........................................................................... 66  
Multiboot Main Window........................................................................................... 67  
Password Main Window.......................................................................................... 69  
System Event Log Main Window ............................................................................ 71  
SDR Manager Main Window................................................................................... 72  
5-10. FRU Manager Main Window................................................................................... 74  
7-1.  
7-2.  
7-3.  
7-4.  
7-5.  
7-6.  
9-1.  
EMP Console in Command State ........................................................................... 78  
EMP Console in Redirect State............................................................................... 79  
Connect Dialog ....................................................................................................... 84  
Power On/Off Dialog............................................................................................... 85  
Reset Dialog ........................................................................................................... 86  
Phonebook Dialog................................................................................................... 87  
Removing/Hot-swapping a Fan............................................................................... 99  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
10-1. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier.................................................................................. 103  
10-2. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly.................................................................. 103  
10-3. Installing a Hard Disk Drive................................................................................... 105  
10-4. Hot-swap SCSI Drive Indicators............................................................................ 107  
11-1. Removing a Power Supply.................................................................................... 111  
12-1. Server Covers....................................................................................................... 120  
12-2. Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel.................................................................. 121  
12-3. Top Cover............................................................................................................. 122  
12-4. PCI Regular Slot Cover......................................................................................... 123  
12-5. PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover ....................................................................................... 124  
12-6. Memory Module Cover.......................................................................................... 126  
13-1. Fan Removal ........................................................................................................ 129  
13-2. Fan Array Housing................................................................................................ 130  
13-3. LCD Module.......................................................................................................... 132  
13-4. Memory Module.................................................................................................... 134  
13-5. Removing a Holddown.......................................................................................... 136  
13-6. DC to DC Converter VRM..................................................................................... 139  
13-7. CPU Tray.............................................................................................................. 141  
13-8. CPU Tray Support Rail ......................................................................................... 142  
13-9. Front Panel Board................................................................................................. 143  
13-10. CPU Baseboard.................................................................................................... 145  
13-11. PHP I/O Baseboard Expansion Slots.................................................................... 147  
13-12. Expansion Slot Cover ........................................................................................... 147  
13-13. Installing an Add-in Board..................................................................................... 148  
13-14. I/O Riser Card....................................................................................................... 151  
13-15. I/O Tray................................................................................................................. 153  
13-16. ICMB Board.......................................................................................................... 155  
13-17. PHP I/O Baseboard .............................................................................................. 157  
13-18. Peripheral Bay ...................................................................................................... 160  
13-19. Peripheral Bay Backplane..................................................................................... 161  
13-20. Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board.......................................................................... 163  
14-1. Diskette Drive ....................................................................................................... 167  
14-2. CD-ROM Drive...................................................................................................... 169  
14-3. Snap-in Plastic Slide Rails .................................................................................... 170  
15-1. Midplane............................................................................................................... 173  
16-1. Peripheral Bay Backplane..................................................................................... 184  
17-1. I/O Riser Card....................................................................................................... 192  
17-2. J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block......................................................................... 193  
17-3. PHP I/O Baseboard Layout................................................................................... 200  
18-1. J31 Jumper Block ................................................................................................. 220  
18-2. CPU Baseboard Layout ........................................................................................ 222  
19-1. 4:1 Interleave With Four DIMMs ........................................................................... 236  
19-2. 4:1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs........................................................................... 237  
19-3. 4:1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs............................................................................... 238  
19-4. Memory Module Layout ........................................................................................ 239  
19-5. DIMM Orientation.................................................................................................. 240  
19-6. Properly Seated DIMM.......................................................................................... 241  
19-7. Removing DIMMs ................................................................................................. 242  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
20-1. Jumper JP1 .......................................................................................................... 250  
21-1. Lithium Back-up Battery........................................................................................ 260  
24-1. Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors .................................................................. 279  
Tables  
7-1.  
7-2.  
EMP Console Access Modes (Server configured for console redirection)............... 79  
EMP Console Access Modes (Server not configured for console redirection)......... 80  
17-1. onfiguration Jumpers (J2C1)................................................................................. 194  
18-1. J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management ................................................. 220  
18-2. J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios.................................................................................. 221  
19-1. Memory Module DIMM Support ............................................................................ 234  
20-1. Power Supply AC Input Ratings............................................................................ 252  
20-2. Power Supply Output Ratings............................................................................... 252  
20-3. Server Board Set Voltages and Currents.............................................................. 253  
20-4. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage......................................................... 254  
20-5. Total Combined Power Used by Your Server........................................................ 255  
23-1. Fan Speed Control................................................................................................ 278  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part I: User’s Guide  
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running  
4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run  
6 SCSI Configuration Utility  
7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping  
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hot Swapping  
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
The modular scaleable architecture of your high-performance rack server supports symmetrical  
multiprocessing (SMP) and a variety of operating systems. The server comes with Peripheral  
Component Interconnect (PCI) and Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) buses. The server board  
set consists of eight individual boards.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CPU baseboard  
Two memory modules  
Front side bus terminator module  
PCI hot-plug (PHP) I/O baseboard  
I/O riser card  
Front panel board  
Midplane  
LVDS (low-voltage differential signal) SCSI hot-swap peripheral bay backplane  
The CPU baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis, and the PHP I/O  
baseboard is mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis. The baseboards plug into  
connectors on the midplane mounted between them. The midplane interconnects the baseboards  
with the memory modules and power supplies. The front panel board is mounted in front of the  
CPU baseboard in the same plane. It provides the user interface, server management, cooling  
system control, and power control.  
OM07311  
Figure 1-1. High-performance Server  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
The easy-to-integrate server can easily accommodate the needs of a variety of high performance  
applications—for example, network servers, multiuser systems, and large database operations. As  
your application requirements increase, you can upgrade your server with:  
•
•
•
•
More powerful processors  
Additional memory  
Other peripheral devices  
Add-in I/O boards  
Server Features  
Feature  
Comment  
Power system with redundancy  
The 750 watt, 220 VAC autoranging power supplies include integrated  
fans for cooling. In a rack server with three supplies (2 + 1), the third  
one is redundant. The supplies can be replaced—hot-swapped—  
without turning the server power off. The server requires a minimum of  
two power supplies. LEDs on the back of the power supply indicate  
power on, failure, and predictive failure.  
Server chassis  
The electrogalvanized metal used in manufacturing the server chassis  
minimizes electromagnetic interference (EMI) and radio frequency  
interference (RFI).  
3.5-inch diskette drive in the 3.5-inch bay.  
5.25-inch IDE CD-ROM drive in the 5.25-inch half-height bay.  
Two 3.5-inch wide by 1.0-inch or 1.6-inch hot-swappable LVDS hard  
disk drives mounted side-by-side in the 3.5-inch hot-docking bays. The  
hot-docking bays allow hot-swapping of hard disk drives without  
shutting down the server.  
Three power supply bays populated with either two or three power  
supplies.  
Ten I/O expansion slot covers.  
The plastic front bezel provides airflow and easy access to drives in the  
hot-docking bays. The removable top covers provide proper airflow  
and easy access to components inside the server. A padlock (not  
supplied) on the back of the chassis secures the covers to prevent  
unauthorized entry into the server—only technically qualified personnel  
should remove the server covers.  
Cooling system with redundancy  
Six fans (5 + 1) cool and circulate air through the server. The sixth fan  
is redundant. The fans can be replaced—hot-swapped—without  
turning the server power off. An LED mounted next to each fan  
guarantees positive identification of the failed fan.  
Integrated power supply fans—two or three—cool and circulate air  
through the power supplies and the bottom of the chassis.  
continued  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
Server Features (continued)  
Feature  
Comment  
Front panel board  
The front panel board provides the user interface to the server. The  
board allows other servers to communicate with this server, even while  
power is down, via an Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB).  
Push-button switches control power-up, reset, and nonmaskable  
interrupt (NMI) functions.  
LEDs indicate power on, power supply failure, hard drive failure, or a  
fan or other server cooling failure.  
An LCD panel provides information about boot status, available number  
of processors, and other server management information.  
Server management  
Interintegrated circuit bus (I2C) for diagnostic and intrachassis  
communication. ICMB for interchassis platform management  
communications.  
Real-time clock/calendar (RTC).  
Front panel controls and indicators (LEDs).  
Basic Input/Output System (BIOS), Power-on Self Test (POST), and  
Setup Utility stored in a flash memory device.  
System Setup Utility (SSU).  
SCSI Configuration Utility.  
Emergency Management Port (EMP) Utility.  
Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) Load  
Utility.  
CPU baseboard  
The baseboard supports up to four Pentium® II Xeon™ processors,  
each processor is packaged in a Single Edge Contact (S.E.C.)  
cartridge; the baseboard supports two memory modules.  
Pentium II Xeon processor  
The cartridge includes the processor core and L2 cache components.  
packaged in an S.E.C. cartridge  
Memory module  
Each memory module supports up to 4 GB of ECC memory using  
sixteen 72-bit dual inline memory modules (DIMMs). (The CPU  
baseboard requires two memory modules, one must contain DIMMS.)  
continued  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server Features (continued)  
Feature  
Comment  
PHP I/O baseboard  
One 16-bit ISA expansion slot shares a common chassis I/O expansion  
slot with a 32-bit PCI slot (you can use the shared slot for either ISA or  
PCI but not both).  
Six 32-bit PCI expansion slots; one of them shares a common chassis  
I/O expansion slot with the ISA slot (you can use the shared slot for  
either PCI or ISA but not both).  
Four 64-bit PCI hot-plug expansion slots.  
Integrated Cirrus Logic GD5446 VisualMedia† PCI super video graphics  
array (SVGA) controller with 2 MB of video memory.  
The Symbios† 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller supports two LVDS  
channels. One channel controls internal devices such as CD-ROMs,  
tape, and DVDs drives, in addition to the two hard drives in the  
peripheral bay. The other channel provides a connection to external  
devices.  
The diskette controller supports one drive.  
The PCI-enhanced Integrated Drive Electronics (IDE) interface  
supports one IDE bus.  
PS/2†-compatible keyboard/mouse controller.  
Two universal serial bus (USB) ports.  
I/O riser card  
This card contains all legacy I/O connections; it plugs into a card edge  
connector on the PHP I/O baseboard.  
PS/2-compatible keyboard and mouse ports (these are  
interchangeable).  
PS/2-compatible parallel port.  
Analog VGA, 15-pin video port.  
Two PS/2-compatible, 9-pin serial ports.  
The midplane  
Midplane  
•
•
•
electrically connects the PHP I/O, memory, power supplies and  
CPU baseboard  
distributes DC power to the PHP I/O and CPU baseboards,  
peripheral bay backplane, cooling fans, and the front panel board  
distributes the power load of the server among two or three  
750 watt autoranging power supplies  
Front side bus (FSB) terminator  
module  
This module plugs into any unpopulated slot 2 connector on the CPU  
baseboard. This module terminates the FSB GTL+ signals of the slot 2  
connector when a processor S.E.C. cartridge is not installed in it.  
Peripheral bay backplane  
This backplane supports hot-swapping of SCA type SCSI drives,  
mounted in carriers, in and out of the hot-docking bays.  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
Chassis  
Figures 1-2 and 1-3 show the major components of the server.  
C
B
A
D
E
OM07330  
Figure 1-2. Chassis, Board Set  
A. Front panel board  
B. CPU baseboard and processors  
C. PHP I/O baseboard  
D. Midplane  
E. Memory modules  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
A
B
C
OM07349  
Figure 1-3. Chassis, Front View  
A. 3.5-inch diskette drive (3.5-inch bay)  
B. CD-ROM drive (5.25-inch bay)  
C. Hot-swap bays  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
A
B C D  
E
F
N
G
H
I
J
M
L
K
OM07300  
Figure 1-4. Chassis, Rear View  
A. PCI and ISA add-in board expansion slots  
B. External LVDS connector  
C. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin  
D. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin  
E. PS/2-compatible serial ports 0 and 1, 9-pin RS-232 connector  
F. Super VGA compatible, 15-pin video connector  
G. PS/2-compatible parallel port (LPT), 25-pin bidirectional subminiature D connector  
H. USB ports 0 and 1, 4-pin connector  
I. Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) connectors port 1 and 2  
J. Power Supplies  
K. Failure LED (yellow)  
L. Predictive failure LED (yellow) for power supply fan  
M. Power LED (green)  
N. AC input power connector  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Controls and Indicators  
Item  
Feature  
Description  
Front Panel  
A
B
Power switch  
When pressed, it turns on or off the DC power inside the server.  
Reset switch  
When pressed, it resets the server and causes the power-on self test  
(POST) to run.  
C
D
NMI switch  
When pressed, it causes a nonmaskable interrupt. This switch is  
recessed behind the front panel to prevent inadvertent activation. It  
must be pressed with a narrow non-conductive tool (not supplied).  
Power LED (green)  
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of DC power in the  
server. It goes out when the power is turned off or the power source  
is disrupted.  
E
F
Power fault LED (yellow)  
When lit continuously, it indicates a power supply failure.  
Cooling fault LED (yellow) When lit, it indicates a fan failure has been detected in the server.  
G
Drive fault LED (yellow)  
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or  
more hard disk drives in the hot-docking bay. When flashing, it  
indicates drive reset in progress.  
H
I
Front panel LCD  
It displays information about processor type and failure codes.  
SCSI drive hot-docking  
bays  
Two SCSI hot docking bays for 3.5-inch x 1.0 inch or 1.6-inch SCSI  
hard drives.  
Status LEDs for SCSI Drives in Hot-docking Bays  
J
Drive fault LED (yellow)  
When lit continuously, it indicates an asserted fault status on one or  
more hard disk drives in the hot-docking bay. When flashing, it  
indicates drive reset in progress.  
K
L
Drive activity LED (green)  
Drive power LED (green)  
When flashing, it indicates drive activity.  
When lit continuously, it indicates the presence of the drive and power  
on the drive.  
CD-ROM Drive  
M
N
O
P
Open/close button  
When pressed, it opens or closes the CD tray.  
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.  
Activity LED  
Volume control  
Headphone jack  
It adjusts the volume of headphones or speakers.  
It provides a connection for headphones or speakers.  
3.5-inch Floppy (Diskette) Drive  
Q
R
Activity LED  
When lit, it indicates the drive is in use.  
When pressed, it ejects the diskette.  
Ejector button  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
A
B
C
D E F G  
H
R
Q
P O  
N M  
I
L K J  
OM07344  
Figure 1-5. Server Controls and Indicators  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server Security  
There are several ways to prevent unauthorized entry or use of the server.  
Security with the Setup utility:  
•
•
Set server administrative and user passwords.  
Set secure mode to prevent keyboard or mouse input and to prevent use of the front panel  
controls.  
Security with the System Setup Utility (SSU):  
•
Enable the keyboard lockout timer so that the server requires a password to reactivate the  
keyboard and mouse after a specified time-out period—1 to 128 minutes.  
Set an administrative password.  
Set a user password.  
Activate the secure mode hot-key.  
•
•
•
•
Disable writing to the diskette drive.  
Password Protection  
BIOS passwords prevent unauthorized tampering with the server. If you set the user password, but  
not the administrative password, the BIOS requires you to enter the user password before you can  
boot the server or run the SSU. If you set both passwords, entering either password lets you boot  
the server or enable the keyboard and mouse. Only the administrative password lets you change  
the server configuration with the flash-resident Setup utility.  
Secure Boot Mode  
The secure boot mode allows the server to boot and run the operating system (OS). However, you  
cannot use either the keyboard or the mouse until you enter the user password.  
You can use Setup to put the server in the secure boot mode. If the BIOS detects a disk in the  
CD-ROM drive or a diskette in floppy drive A at boot time, it prompts you for a password. When  
you enter the password, the server boots from the disk in the CD-ROM drive or the diskette in  
drive A. Entering a password also disables the secure mode.  
If there is no disk in the CD-ROM drive or diskette in drive A, the server boots from drive C. It  
automatically goes into secure mode. All enabled secure mode features go into effect at boot time.  
If you set a hot-key combination, you can secure the server immediately.  
Boot Sequence Control  
The BIOS security features determine the boot devices and the boot sequence. They also control  
disabling writes to the diskette drive in secure mode. You can use the SSU to select each boot  
device. The default boot sequence is diskette, hard disk, CD-ROM, and Network.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 1 Introduction to the High-performance Server  
Boot Without Keyboard  
The server can boot with or without a keyboard. Before it boots, the BIOS displays a message  
about the keyboard stating whether or not it detects one. During POST, the BIOS automatically  
detects and tests the keyboard if it is present.  
Locked Power and Reset Switches  
The power and reset push-button switches on the front panel are locked when the server is in the  
secure mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.  
Diskette Write Protect  
If Diskette Write Protect is enabled in Setup, it write-protects the diskette drive only while the  
server is in the secure mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.  
Video Blanking  
If Video Blanking is enabled in Setup, the video display will be off when the server is in the secure  
mode. To exit from the secure mode, you must enter your user password.  
Emergency Management Port (EMP)  
The Emergency Management Port (EMP) is a feature of Server Management. EMP lets the Front  
Panel Controller (FPC) communicate with a EMP console via the serial port even if the server  
power is off. To enable this feature in the flash-resident Setup, an administrator must enter a  
unique EMP password. If the administrator enters a new EMP password or clears an old one, the  
BIOS sends the appropriate command via the I2C bus interface to the FPC. If the administrator  
wants to change the password from within Setup again, the new password must be entered twice.  
If the administrator sets the Password Clear jumper to the Clear position, the BIOS clears the  
administrator and user passwords. It also attempts to clear the EMP password. If the FPC is not  
present or is not functioning properly, the BIOS times out and continues.  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Blank page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
This chapter tells how to:  
•
•
•
Select a site  
Connect input and output devices  
Turn on the server and create installation diskettes from the Server System Configuration  
Software CD  
•
•
Read and print a copy of this manual  
Exit to DOS  
WARNING  
The minimum server configuration weighs about 51.4 kg (113 lbs), and  
the maximum one weighs close to 60 kg (132 lbs). To avoid personal  
injury, have someone help you move the server. Do not attempt to lift  
or move the server by holding the handles on the power supply.  
Selecting a Site  
The server operates reliably within the specified environmental limits (see page 30). The chosen  
site must be close to a grounded power outlet applicable for the electrical code of that region. The  
minimum available power requirements are described in Chapter 20, “Power System:  
Description/Calculating Power Usage”.  
CAUTION  
Ensure that the power service connection is through a properly grounded  
outlet.  
The site must also be:  
•
•
•
Clean and dust-free  
Well ventilated and away from sources of heat  
Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields and electrical noise caused by electrical devices  
such as air conditioners, large fans, large electric motors, radio and TV transmitters, and high  
frequency security devices  
•
•
Spacious enough to provide sufficient room behind and around the server so that you can  
remove AC power from it by unplugging the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet  
Away from sources of vibration or physical shock  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Physical Specifications  
Height  
Width  
Depth  
Weight  
31.12 cm (12.25 inches)  
44.45 cm (17.5 inches)  
71.12 cm (28.0 inches)  
51.4 kg (113 lbs) minimum configuration; 60 kg (132 lbs) maximum configuration  
Environmental Specifications  
Temperature  
Nonoperating  
–40° to 70 °C (–40° to 158 °F)  
5° to 40 °C (41° to 104 °F); with maximum derated 1°C for every 1000 ft  
(305 m) above 1524 m (5000 ft).  
Operating  
Humidity  
Operating wet bulb  
Nonoperating  
Operating  
Not to exceed 37.6 °C (100.4 °F) without peripherals  
95% noncondensing at 55 °C (131 °F)  
85% noncondensing at 40 °C (104 °F)  
Shock  
Nonoperating  
Operating  
30 g trapezoidal, 11 msec  
2.0 g, 11 msec, 1/2 sine  
Altitude  
Acoustic  
0 to 3048 m (0 to 10000 ft) Maximum ambient temperature is linearly  
derated between 1524 m (5000 ft) and 3048 m (10000 ft) by 1 °C per  
305 m (1000 ft)  
Sound pressure  
Sound power  
<=55dbA at ambient temperatures < 28 °C measured at bystander  
positions in operating mode.  
<= 6.5 BA at ambient temperatures < 28 °C in operating mode.  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD)  
Tested to 20 kilovolts (kV), no component damage. (CD-ROM drive tested  
to 15 kV, manufacturer’s specification.)  
AC Input Power  
100-120 V~  
Two ( or three) power supplies, fully loaded  
100-120 V~, 6.0 A, 50/60 Hz  
200-240 V~  
200-240 V~, 4.0 A, 50/60 Hz  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
After Unpacking the Server  
Inspect the shipping box for evidence of mishandling during transit. If the shipping box is  
damaged, photograph it for reference. After removing the contents, keep the damaged box and the  
packing materials. If the contents appear damaged, file a damage claim with the carrier  
immediately.  
Save the shipping boxes and packing materials to repackage the server in the event you decide to  
move it to another site.  
Connecting Peripheral Devices  
CAUTION  
Before connecting peripheral devices to the server, verify that the power  
cord is unplugged from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet. Otherwise,  
equipment damage can result.  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server  
covers and to access any of the components inside the server.  
If your server normally operates without a video monitor and keyboard—for example, as a  
network server—you must install them to configure it. You may remove them after running the  
SSU. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run” for information about running this  
utility.  
Connect your keyboard, mouse, monitor, and other peripheral devices after a qualified service  
technician installs internal options. See Figure 2-1.  
Keyboard and Mouse  
Connect the signal cable of a PS/2-compatible keyboard or mouse to either one  
of the 6-pin miniature Deutsche Industrie Norm (DIN) connectors on the server  
back panel. The BIOS detects and initializes the keyboard and mouse ports  
accordingly. Each port is overcurrent protected by a 1-ampere positive  
temperature coefficient (PTC) resistor.  
Monitor  
Connect the signal cable of the video monitor to the 15-pin connector of the  
Super VGA port on the back panel.  
Other Devices  
Connect other external peripheral devices by following the manufacturer’s  
documentation. The back panel also provides two serial ports, a parallel port,  
and two USB ports. The back of the chassis provides two Intelligent Chassis  
Management Bus (ICMB) ports.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
A
C
B
D
I
F
E
H
G
OM07335  
Figure 2-1. Server I/O Connections  
A. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin connector  
B. PS/2-compatible keyboard/mouse port, 6-pin connector  
C. PS/2-compatible serial port 2 (COM2), 9-pin RS-232 connector  
D. PS/2-compatible serial port 1 (COM1), 9-pin RS-232 connector  
E. Super VGA compatible, 15-pin video connector  
F. PS/2-compatible parallel port (LPT), 25-pin bidirectional subminiature D connector  
G. USB ports 0 and 1, 4-pin connectors  
H. External LVDS SCSI connector  
I. Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) port 1 and 2, SEMCONN† 6-pin  
connector  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
Obtaining a Power Cord Set  
WARNING  
Do not attempt to modify or use an AC power cord that is not the exact  
type required.  
Because a power cord is not supplied for the server, you must obtain a power cord that meets the  
following criteria:  

For North America the cord must be UL Listed/CSA Certified, 14/3, 75 °C type SJT with  
NEMA 6-15P attachment plug and IEC 320, C19 outlet.  

For outside North America the cord must be flexible VDE certified or <HAR> (harmonized)  
rated 250 V, 0.75 mm2 minimum conductor size with IEC 320, C19 outlet and rated for no less  
than the product ratings. The attachment plug shall be a three conductor grounding type, rated  
125% of the total input current rating of the product and must be for the configuration in the  
specific region or country. The attachment plug must bear at least an accepted safety agency  
certification mark for the specific region or country.  

The cord must be no longer than 4.5 meters (14.76 ft).  
Turning on Your Server  
WARNING  
The push-button on/off power switch on the front panel of the server  
does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC power from the server,  
you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.  
1. Make sure all external devices, such as a video monitor, keyboard, and mouse (optional) have  
been connected.  
2. Remove drive protection cards (if present) from the removable media drives.  
3. Turn on your video monitor.  
4. Plug the female end of the power cord into the AC inlet filter receptacle on the back of the  
chassis.  
5. Plug the male end of the power cord into a properly grounded power outlet. See page 29 for  
power outlet requirements.  
6. If the server does not come on when you plug the power cord into the power outlet, press the  
power switch on the front panel.  
7. Verify that the power-on light on the front panel is lit. After a few seconds the power-on self  
test (POST) begins. See “Power-on Self Test” on page 35.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
A
B
C
D E F G  
H
OM07334  
Figure 2-2. Server Power and Reset Switches  
A. Power switch  
B. Reset switch  
C. NMI switch  
D. Power LED (green)  
E. Power fault LED (yellow)  
F. Cooling fault LED (yellow)  
G. Drive fault (yellow)  
H. Front panel LCD  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
Power-on Self Test  
Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and the power-on self  
test (POST) starts running. POST checks the I/O system board, processor system board, keyboard,  
and most installed peripheral devices.  
During the memory test, POST displays the amount of memory that it is able to access and test.  
Depending on the amount of memory installed on each memory board, the test may take several  
minutes.  
These screen prompts and messages appear after the memory test:  
Mouse initialized....  
Keboard detected  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
Do NOT press <F2>. The above message remains for about a second, and POST continues. The  
server beeps once, and this message appears:  
Operating system not found  
Go to “Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD” on page 36.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Booting From the Server Configuration Software CD  
CAUTION  
The Server Configuration Software CD contains only a limited operating  
system. This limited operating system provides enough function to let you  
boot from the CD and copy and use the utility and manual files from the CD.  
But this limited OS is NOT intended to be copied onto diskettes or onto your  
hard disk as a full-function OS that supports networking or Windows†. To  
run your server and applications, you must buy the OS of your choice and  
install it on the server.  
See Figure 2-3.  
1. Open the CD tray by pressing the open/close button on the front panel of the CD-ROM drive—  
the tray will slide out of the drive.  
2. Open the CD case. Press down on the center hub of the case with your finger to release the  
hub tension on the CD.  
CAUTION  
Handle the CD only by the inner and outer edges. Do not touch the data side  
of the CD—the side without the label.  
3. Gently grasp the center hole and outer edge of the CD, remove it from the case, and place it  
label-side up in the tray.  
4. Press the open/close button or gently push on the tray—it will automatically slide into the  
drive.  
A
B
OM06774  
Figure 2-3. CD-ROM Drive  
A. Open/close push-button switch  
B. CD tray  
5. Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server.  
6. When POST completes, the server beeps once, boots from the CD, installs a mouse driver, and  
displays the CD-ROM menu. Use the arrow keys to scroll through the menu bar and to view  
the tasks in the pop-up menus.  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
NOTE  
✏
If you do not see the CD-ROM menu but see the following message instead,  
Operating system not found  
you need to change the “Boot Device Priority” to the CD-ROM. See  
“Server Won’t Boot From the CD” on page 38 for instructions.  
Copying Configuration Software to Diskettes  
When you copy software from the CD onto diskettes, device drivers suitable for several different  
operating systems are copied onto the diskettes. However, your operating system will read only  
those drivers it can recognize, so you cannot usually check the directory of a diskette that is not  
formatted for your operating system. Instead, you may see a message to the effect, “disk not  
formatted, do you want to format it now?” Don’t worry; the drivers for YOUR operating system  
should be present on the diskette and available for you to load on the system.  
1. Before starting, make sure that you have on hand several blank high-density diskettes.  
2. From the CD-ROM menu bar, select Create Diskettes and press <Enter>.  
3. Follow the prompts to copy the software onto the diskettes.  
4. When finished, select Quit to DOS (on the CD-ROM menu bar), and press <Enter>.  
5. Remove the CD from the drive.  
Installing Video Drivers  
After configuring the server, you can install various video drivers to take full advantage of the  
enhanced features provided by the onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator.  
The server may not operate properly without these drivers installed.  
After copying the drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes, read the  
README.TXT file on the Display Drivers and DOS Utilities diskette. The .TXT file contains the  
most current information about which video drivers you need to install on your server. Follow the  
installation instructions in the README.TXT file.  
Follow these steps to install these drivers::  
1. Fully configure your server. (This can include adding application software, an ISA add-in  
board, PCI add-in boards, and the like.)  
2. Insert disk 1 of the video drivers and utilities for MS-DOS† and Windows into drive A.  
3. At the DOS command prompt, type A:installand press <Enter>.  
4. Follow the onscreen directions to install the video drivers.  
Installing SCSI Drivers  
After copying the SCSI drivers from the Configuration Software CD to diskettes, follow the  
instructions in the README.TXT file on the first diskette to install the drivers.  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server Won’t Boot From the CD  
It is possible that your server was shipped with the diskette drive or another device set as the first  
boot device. If so, the server will try to boot from a diskette or other device rather than from the  
CD we have provided. By pressing <Esc> during POST, you can override the boot sequence  
specified in Setup by selecting a different primary boot device. This override is valid only for that  
specific boot. Subsequent boots revert back to the sequence specified in Setup. If the chosen  
device fails to load the operating system, the BIOS reverts to the previous boot sequence. The  
<Esc> hot key is valid while the “Press <F2> key to enter Setup” message is displayed on the  
screen. At the end of POST, if the <Esc> key was pressed, a pop-up boot menu is displayed. It  
allows you to change the boot sequence, or to enter Setup and permanently change the sequence.  
Follow these steps to install these drivers:  
1. Press the reset switch on the front panel to reboot the server—the CD can be in the drive or  
not.  
2. When POST displays this message:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
3. Press <Esc> and wait for the following boot menu to display:  
OM08360  
Figure 2-4. Boot Menu  
4. From the boot menu, select the CD-ROM drive, and press <Enter>.  
5. When you see the following pop-up menu, press <Enter> to boot from the CD.  
OM08361  
Figure 2-5. CD-ROM Boot Menu  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 2 On-site Installation: Installing the Server  
The server should now boot from the CD, displaying a menu bar that includes creating diskettes,  
diagnostics, reading/printing the manual, and quitting to DOS.  
CAUTION  
If the server does not operate as described in this chapter, contact a qualified  
service technician.  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page should be blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3 Power-on Self Test: Description/Running  
Power-on Self Test (POST)  
WARNING  
The push-button on/off power switch on the front panel of the server  
does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC power from the server,  
you must unplug the power cord from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.  
Each time you turn on the server the power LED on the front panel turns on and POST starts  
running. It checks the PHP I/O baseboard, CPU baseboard, keyboard, and most installed  
peripheral devices. During the memory test, POST displays the amount of memory that it is able  
to access and test. Depending on the amount of memory installed on the memory module, it may  
take several minutes to complete the memory test.  
Turn on your video monitor and server. After a few seconds the power-on self test (POST) begins.  
You can enter Setup when POST displays this message:  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
If you press <F2>, follow the instructions on the monitor when Setup appears.  
NOTE  
✏
Because POST must complete test and initialization functions after pressing  
<F2>, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup.  
If you do not press <F2>, POST continues.  
During boot, the server recognizes and displays the BIOS banner for the onboard Sl53C896 SCSI  
host adapter on the PHP I/O baseboard.  
When the BIOS banner for the SCSI host adapter appears, you can run the included SCSI  
configuration utility by pressing <Ctrl+C> when this message appears:  
Press <Ctrl><C> To Enter Configuration Utility!  
If you have installed SCSI devices in the server, press <Ctrl+C>. When the utility appears, follow  
the instructions on the monitor to configure the host adapter. See Chapter 6, “SCSI Configuration  
Utility,” for instructions.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
If POST detects an error, it displays the error code, the server beeps once, and this message  
appears:  
Press <F1> to Resume, <F2> for Setup  
To resume, press <F1>. However, if a drive with bootable media is not detected, the server beeps  
once, and this message appears:  
Operating System not found  
To enter Setup, Press <F2>. When the Setup utility appears, follow the instructions on the  
monitor.  
If POST did not detect an error and you choose not to run the SCSI Configuration Utility, POST  
continues, the server beeps once, and this message appears:  
Operating System not found  
See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” for instructions on creating software  
installation diskettes.  
If the server halts before POST completes running, it emits a beep code indicating a fatal system  
error that requires immediate attention. If POST can display a message on the video monitor, it  
causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears.  
Note the screen display and write down the beep code you hear; this information is useful for your  
service representative. For a listing of beep codes and error messages that POST can generate, see  
Chapter 22, "Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages."  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
The flash-resident BIOS Setup utility is used to configure PHP I/O baseboard resources. It is  
stored in both flash memory (NVRAM) and the battery-backed memory of the real-time clock  
(RTC) on the PHP I/O baseboard.  
When to Run the BIOS Setup Utility  
The BIOS Setup is a flash-based configuration utility that is used to configure onboard resources  
and to set user-selectable options such as boot device ordering, keyboard autorepeat, and security.  
Use Setup to configure the server into a bootable state, and then use the SSU and other utilities to  
further configure the server.  
Setup lets you change the server configuration defaults. It does not allow you to enter or change  
information about PCI or ISA add-in boards; you must use the SSU instead. Setup stores the  
configuration values in flash memory; they take effect when you boot the server. POST checks  
these values against the actual hardware configuration; if they do not agree, POST generates an  
error message. You must then run Setup to specify the correct configuration.  
You can run Setup with or without an operating system being present.  
Because values entered using Setup are overwritten when you run the SSU, you should run Setup  
only under the following conditions:  
•
•
If the diskette drive is disabled.  
If the server has a diskette drive that is disabled or improperly configured, use Setup to  
configure the server into a bootable state, and then use the SSU and other utilities to further  
configure the server. In Setup, you can enable the drive so you can use the SSU. If necessary,  
you can disable the diskette drive again after exiting the SSU.  
•
•
If the server does not have a diskette drive, or it is disabled, use Setup to configure the server.  
If you have installed only an ISA add-in board in your server.  
If the server has a properly configured, enabled diskette drive, use the SSU to configure the server.  
Information entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup.  
Running the Setup Utility  
You can enter Setup under several conditions:  
•
•
•
when you turn on the server  
when you reboot the server by pressing the push-button reset switch on the front panel  
when you reboot the server by pressing <Ctrl+Alt+Del> while at the DOS operating system  
prompt  
•
when you turn on or reset your server after an orderly shutdown of an operating system other  
than DOS  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Each time you turn on or reboot your server POST begins and, after a few seconds, displays this  
message:  
Press <F2> to enter Setup  
After pressing F2, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests and  
initialization functions. When the F2 prompt disappears, pressing F2 will have no effect. When  
Setup is entered, the Main Menu options page is displayed.  
Use the following keys to navigate through the menus and submenus.  
Press  
F1  
To  
Get help about an item  
ESC  
↑
Go back to a previous item  
Select the previous value in a menu option list  
Select the next value in a menu option list  
Select a major menu  
↓
← →  
-
Change the value of the current menu item to the previous value  
Change the value of the current menu item to the next value  
Activate submenus, select feature options, and change feature values  
Display the following message:  
+
Enter  
F9  
Setup Confirmation  
Load default configuration now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all Setup fields return to their  
default values. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to the configuration it had  
before you pressed <F9>, without affecting any existing field values.  
F10  
Display the following message:  
Setup Confirmation  
Save configuration changes and exit now?  
[Yes]  
[No]  
The [Yes] button will be highlighted. If you press <Enter>, all current Setup values are saved,  
and the system is reset. If you press <ESC> or select No, the server returns to the  
configuration it had before you pressed <F10>, without affecting any existing values.  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Main Menu  
Default values are in bold typeface, and auto-configured values are shaded.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
System Time  
HH:MM:SS  
Set the System Time. To select a field, press <Tab>,  
<Shift + Tab>, or <Enter>. Then type in a new value. If  
you replace the battery, the default time is 00:00. (This is  
a 24-hour clock.)  
System Date  
MM/DD/YYYY  
Set the System Date. To select a field, press <Tab>,  
<Shift + Tab>, or <Enter>. Then type in a new value. If  
you replace the battery, the default date is Jan 1990.  
Legacy Diskette A:  
Disabled  
Select the diskette type for drive A:. (The 1.25 MB,  
3.5-inch refers to a 1024 byte/sector Japanese media  
format. To support the 1.25 MB, 3.5-inch requires a  
3.5-inch 3-mode diskette drive.)  
360 KB, 5 ¼”  
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”  
720 KB, 3 ½”  
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”  
2.88 MB, 3 ½”  
Legacy Diskette B:  
Disabled  
Select the diskette type for drive B: (The size 1.25 MB,  
3.5-inch refers to a 1024 byte/sector Japanese media  
format. To support the 1.25 MB, 3.5-inch requires a  
3.5-inch 3-mode diskette drive.)  
360 KB, 5 ¼”  
1.2 MB, 5 ¼”  
720 KB, 3 ½”  
1.44/1.25 MB, 3 ½”  
2.88 MB, 3 ½”  
Primary Master  
CD-ROM  
Press <Enter> for options.  
Autotype Fixed Disk:  
Press <Enter>  
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for  
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.  
Type:  
User  
Auto  
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk  
drive installed at this connection.  
1-39  
CD-ROM  
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.  
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive  
installed here.  
ATAPI Removable  
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.  
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.  
Multi-sector Transfers: Disabled  
LBA Mode Control  
32-bit I/O:  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.  
Enabled  
Transfer Mode  
Standard  
Disabled  
Ultra DMA Mode:  
Primary Slave  
None  
Press <Enter> for options.  
Autotype Fixed Disk:  
Press <Enter>  
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for  
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.  
continued  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Main Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Type:  
User  
Auto  
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk  
drive installed at this connection.  
1-39  
CD-ROM  
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.  
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive  
installed here.  
ATAPI Removable  
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.  
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.  
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.  
32-bit I/O:  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Ultra DMA Mode:  
Disabled  
Secondary Master  
None  
Press <Enter> for options.  
Autotype Fixed Disk:  
Press <Enter>  
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for  
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.  
Type:  
User  
Auto  
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk  
drive installed at this connection.  
1-39  
CD-ROM  
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.  
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive  
installed here.  
ATAPI Removable  
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.  
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.  
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.  
32-bit I/O:  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Ultra DMA Mode:  
Secondary Slave  
Disabled  
None  
Press <Enter> for options.  
Autotype Fixed Disk:  
Press <Enter>  
Pressing <Enter> attempts to detect the drive type for  
drives that comply with ANSI specifications.  
Type:  
User  
Auto  
User—lets you enter the parameters of the hard disk  
drive installed at this connection.  
1-39  
CD-ROM  
Auto—autotypes the hard disk drive installed here.  
1-39—lets you select the predetermined hard disk drive  
installed here.  
ATAPI Removable  
CD-ROM—a CD-ROM is installed here.  
ATAPI Removable—removable disk drive installed here.  
Enabled allows 32-bit IDE data transfers.  
32-bit I/O:  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Ultra DMA Mode:  
Disabled  
Processor Information  
Press <Enter>  
Displays information about all processors. You cannot  
modify any items in this menu. Consult your system  
administrator if an item requires changing.  
Processor 1  
Processor 1  
Processor 2  
Stepping ID 2.  
L2 cache size [512 KB].  
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.  
continued  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Main Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Processor 3  
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.  
Stepping ID, absent or disabled.  
Processor 4  
Keyboard Features  
Numlock:  
Press <Enter> for options.  
Auto  
On  
Select power-on state for numlock.  
Off  
Key Click:  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled produces the key click.  
Select key repeat rate.  
Keyboard auto-repeat  
rate:  
30/sec  
26.7/sec  
21.8/sec  
18.5/sec  
13.3/sec  
10/sec  
6/sec  
2/sec  
Keyboard auto-repeat  
delay:  
1/4 sec  
1/2 sec  
3/4 sec  
1 sec  
Select delay before key repeat.  
Language  
English (US)  
Français  
Deutsch  
Select the display language for the BIOS.  
Italiano  
Español  
Advanced Menu  
Setup Warning  
Setting items on this menu to incorrect values may cause your system to malfunction.  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Plug & Play O/S:  
No  
Yes  
Select Yes if you are using a Plug and Play capable  
operating system.  
Select No if you need the BIOS to configure nonboot  
devices.  
Reset Configuration  
Data:  
No  
Yes  
Select Yes if you want to clear the system configuration  
data.  
Enable ACPI  
No  
Yes  
Select Yes if you want to enable the advanced  
configuration and power interface (ACPI) BIOS.  
Use Multiprocessor  
Specification  
1.1  
1.4  
Configure the Multiprocessor Specification revision level.  
Some OSs require 1.1 for compatibility.  
Large Disk Access  
Mode  
CHS  
LBA  
Select the drive access method for IDE drives. Most OSs  
use logical block addressing (LBA). However, some  
operating systems may use the cylinder head sector  
(CHS). See your OS documentation for further help.  
continued  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Advanced Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Pause Before Boot  
Disabled  
Pause five seconds before booting the OS.  
Enabled  
PCI Configurations  
Additional Setup menus to configure PCI devices.  
Setup items for configuring the specific PCI device.  
PCI Device,  
Embedded SCSI A  
Option ROM Scan:  
Enable Master:  
Latency Timer:  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Initialize device expansion ROM.  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enable selected device as a PCI bus master.  
Default  
0020h  
0040h  
0060h  
0080h  
00A0h  
00C0h  
00E0h  
Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in  
units of PCI bus clocks.  
PCI Devices  
Option ROM Scan:  
Enabled  
Initialize device expansion ROM.  
Disabled  
Enable Master:  
Latency Timer:  
Enabled  
Disabled  
Enable selected device as a PCI bus master.  
Default  
0020h  
0040h  
0060h  
0080h  
00A0h  
00C0h  
00E0h  
Allot minimum guaranteed time slice for bus master in  
units of PCI bus clocks.  
I/O Device  
Configuration  
Serial Port A  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
Configure serial port A using these options:  
•
•
•
•
Disabled—no configuration.  
Enabled—user configuration.  
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.  
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by  
the OS.  
Base I/O Address  
Interrupt  
3F8  
2F8  
3E8  
2E8  
Set the base I/O address for serial port A.  
IRQ3  
Set the interrupt for serial port A.  
IRQ4  
continued  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Advanced Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Configure serial port B using these options:  
Serial Port B  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
•
•
•
•
Disabled—no configuration.  
Enabled—user configuration.  
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.  
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by  
the OS.  
Base I/O Address  
3F8  
2F8  
3E8  
2E8  
Set the base I/O address for serial port B.  
Interrupt  
IRQ3  
Set the interrupt for serial port B.  
IRQ4  
Parallel Port  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
Configure the parallel port using these options:  
•
•
•
•
Disabled—no configuration.  
Enabled—user configuration.  
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.  
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by  
the OS.  
Mode  
Output only  
Bidirectional  
EPP  
Set the mode for the parallel port.  
ECP  
Interrupt  
IRQ5  
Set the interrupt for the parallel port.  
IRQ7  
Diskette Controller  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Auto  
Configure the diskette controller using these options:  
•
•
•
•
Disabled—no configuration.  
Enabled—user configuration.  
Auto—BIOS or OS chooses the configuration.  
OS Controlled—displayed when controlled by  
the OS.  
Base I/O Address  
Primary  
Set the base I/O address for the diskette controller.  
Secondary  
Advanced Chip Set  
Control  
Address Bit Permuting Disabled  
Enabled automatically sets two-way or four-way  
permuting based on the memory configuration. Enabled  
requires:  
Enabled  
•
•
•
number of rows to be a power of two.  
all rows to be the same size.  
all populated rows to be adjacent and start at row 0.  
Card to Card  
Interleave  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled requires a symmetric RAM configuration  
between two memory modules.  
continued  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Advanced Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Base RAM Step  
1 MB  
1 KB  
Tests base memory once per MB or once per KB or  
every location.  
Every location  
Extended RAM Step  
L2 Cache  
1 MB  
1 KB  
Every location  
Tests extended memory once per MB or once per KB or  
every location.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled causes the secondary cache to be sized and  
enabled. Disabled causes the L2 cache to be disabled  
for core clock frequency bus ratios equal to 2.  
ISA Expansion  
Aliasing  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled causes every I/O access with an address in the  
range of x100h-x3FFh, x500h-x7FFh, x900h-xBFFh, and  
xD00h-xFFFh to be internally aliased to the range 0100h-  
03FFh before performing any other address range  
checking.  
Memory Scrubbing  
Restreaming Buffer  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled lets the BIOS automatically detect and correct  
single-bit memory errors.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
When enabled, the data returned and buffered for a  
delayed inbound read may be reaccessed following a  
disconnect.  
Read Prefetch for  
PXB0A  
16  
32  
64  
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be  
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.  
Read Prefetch for  
PXB0B  
16  
32  
64  
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be  
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.  
Read Prefetch for  
PXB1A  
16  
32  
64  
Configures the number of “Dwords” that will be  
prefetched on memory read multiple commands.  
Multiboot Support  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Only enable when the total number of bootable devices is  
less than eight.  
Special VGA Devnode Disabled  
Enable this node only when nonPCI compliant VGA  
cards need to be debugged. Enabling will impact I/O  
resources for a large configuration.  
Enabled  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Security Menu  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
User Password Is  
Clear  
When you enter your user password, this field  
automatically changes to set.  
Administrator  
Password Is  
Clear  
When you enter your administrator password, this field  
automatically changes to set.  
Set User Password  
Enter  
The user password controls access to the system at boot.  
To enter a password, press <Enter> and follow the  
screen prompts.  
Set Administrator  
Password  
Enter  
The administrator password controls access to the setup  
utility. To enter a password, press <Enter> and follow  
the screen prompts.  
Password on Boot  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Requires password entry before boot. The system  
remains in the secure mode until you enter the password.  
Password on Boot takes precedence over Secure Mode  
Boot.  
Diskette Access  
User  
Controls access to diskette drives.  
Administrator  
Secure Mode Timer  
Disabled  
1 min  
2 min  
5 min  
10 min  
20 min  
1 hr  
Select the time-out period of keyboard or mouse inactivity  
required before the secure mode activates. (A password  
must be entered for the secure mode to work.)  
2 hr  
Secure Mode Hot Key [ ]  
Select a hot key, and then press <Ctrl+Alt+(your hot  
key)> to place the system in the secure mode. The key  
should not conflict with any application. Available  
choices are A-Z and 0-9. Press <Del> to remove the  
hot key.  
Secure Mode Boot  
Video Blanking  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled lets the system boots in the secure mode.  
Requires a password to unlock the system.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled blanks video when the secure mode activates.  
Requires a password to unlock the system.  
Diskette Write Protect  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled write protects the diskette drive when the  
Secure Mode activates. Requires a password to restore  
the diskette writes.  
Front Panel Lockout  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled disables the front panel controls when the  
Secure Mode activates. Requires a password to unlock  
the system.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server Menu  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
System Management  
An additional setup menu for changing server  
management features.  
Firmware SMIs  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Disabled turns off all firmware SMI sources.  
Enabled logs critical system events.  
Enabled cleans the system event log.  
System Event Logging Disabled  
Enabled  
Clear Event Log  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Assert NMI on AERR  
Assert NMI on BERR  
Assert NMI on PERR  
Assert NMI on SERR  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the Firmware SMIs  
option is required to assert an NMI.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the Firmware SMIs  
option is required to assert an NMI.  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled generates an NMI. Enabling the SERR option is  
required to activate this option.  
Disabled  
Enabled generates an NMI.  
Enabled  
Enable Host Bus Error Disabled  
Enables host single- and multi-bit errors.  
Enabled  
Server Management  
Information  
Displays system serial number, part number, and server  
management controller revisions. All items on this menu  
cannot be modified in user mode. If any items require  
changes, please consult your system administrator.  
Board Part Number  
Board Serial Number  
System Part Number  
System Serial Number  
Chassis Part Number  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Chassis Serial  
Number  
BMC Revision  
FPC Revision  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Information only.  
Primary HSBP  
Revision  
Secondary HSBP  
Revision  
Information only.  
Console Redirection  
Additional setup menus to configure the console.  
COM Port Address  
Disabled  
3F8  
2F8  
Select the port address. Make sure these values are  
identical to those of serial ports A and B in the peripheral  
configuration setup menu.  
3E8  
IRQ #  
None  
continued  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Server Menu (continued)  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Baud Rate  
9600  
Select the baud rate.  
19.2 K  
38.4 K  
115.2 K  
Flow Control  
No Flow Control  
CTS/RTS  
XON/XOFF  
Select the flow control.  
•
•
•
CTS/RTS = Hardware  
XON/XOFF = Software  
CTS/RTS + CD  
CTS/RTS + CD = Hardware + carrier detect for  
modem use.  
Processor Retest  
No  
Yes  
Yes causes the BIOS to clear historical processor status  
and retest all processors on the next boot.  
EMP Password Switch Disabled  
Enable or disable the EMP password.  
Enabled  
EMP ESC Sequence  
The front panel controller firmware updates this field.  
The front panel controller firmware updates this field.  
EMP Hangup Line  
String  
Modem Init String  
This string accepts up to 16 characters. The upper four  
characters will go to the next field which will pop up as  
soon as the 16th character is filled. Trying to fill the 17th  
character in the same field will have a wraparound  
problem.  
EMP Access Mode  
Preboot Only  
Always Active  
Preboot Only—EMP enabled during power down or  
POST.  
Disabled  
Always Active—EMP always enabled.  
Disabled—EMP disabled.  
EMP Restricted Mode  
Access  
Disabled  
Enabled  
When enabled, power down, front panel NMI, and reset  
control via EMP are disabled. Restricted mode can be  
selected with preboot or always active.  
EMP Direct  
Connect/Modem  
Mode  
Direct Connect  
Modem Mode  
You can connect directly to the port or use a modem.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Boot Menu  
Feature  
Option  
Description  
Diskette Check:  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Enabled verifies the diskette type on boot. Disabled  
speeds up the boot process.  
Boot Device Priority  
Select the search order for the types of boot devices.  
1. Diskette Drive  
Use the up and down arrow keys to select a device.  
Press <+> to move it up the list, and press <-> to move it  
down the list. Press <Esc> to exit this menu.  
2. Removable  
Devices  
3. Hard Drive  
4. ATAPI CD-ROM  
Drive  
Hard Drive  
The system attempts to boot to the OS from the first hard  
drive in this list. If it does not find an OS, the system tries  
the next drive listed until if finds an OS. Use the up and  
down arrow keys to select a device. Press <+> to move  
it up the list, and press <-> to move it down the list.  
Press <Esc> to exit this menu.  
Removable Devices  
The OS assigns drive letters to these devices in the order  
displayed. Change the sequence and the drive lettering  
of a device by selecting it with the up and down arrow  
keys. Press <+> to move it up the list, and press <-> to  
move it down the list. Press <Esc> to exit this menu.  
Maximum Number of  
I20 Drives  
1
4
Selects the maximum number of I20 drives that will be  
assigned a DOS drive letter.  
Message Timeout  
Multiplier  
1
2
All timeout values will be multiplied by this number.  
4
8
10  
50  
100  
1000  
Pause During Post  
Disabled  
Enabled  
Select enabled when you need to start the IRTOS  
manually. When you hear three beeps, POST has  
stopped. Press any key to continue.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 4 Setup Utility: When to Run  
Exit Menu Selections  
The following menu options are available on the Server menu. Select an option by using the up or  
down arrow keys. Then press <Enter> to execute the option, and follow the prompts.  
Option  
Description  
Exit Saving Changes  
Exit Discarding Changes  
Load Setup Defaults  
Load Custom Defaults  
Save Custom Defaults  
Exit Setup and save your changes to CMOS.  
Exit Setup without saving data to CMOS.  
Load default values for all Setup items.  
Load settings from custom defaults.  
Save changes to custom defaults. Normally PhoenixBios reads setup  
settings from CMOS. However, if CMOS fails, it uses custom defaults—if you  
have set them. If not, it uses factory defaults.  
Discard Changes  
Save Changes  
Load previous values from CMOS for all Setup items.  
Save Setup data to CMOS.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This page is blank  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5 System Setup Utility: When to Run  
The System Setup Utility (SSU) is on the Server System Configuration Software CD shipped with  
the server. The SSU provides a graphical user interface (GUI) over an extensible framework for  
server configuration. For the AC450NX systems, the SSU framework supports the following  
functions and capabilities:  
•
assigns resources to baseboard devices and add-in cards prior to loading the operating  
system (OS)  
•
•
•
•
•
allows you to specify boot device order and system security options  
permits viewing and clearing of the system’s critical event log  
Permits viewing of the system FRU and SDRs  
allows troubleshooting of the server when the OS is not operational  
provides a system level view of the server’s I/O devices  
When to Run the System Setup Utility  
The SSU is a DOS-based utility that supports extended system configuration operations for  
onboard resources and add-in boards. The utility also allows you to view the system event log  
(SEL) and to set system boot and security options. Use the SSU when you need to:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
add and remove boards affecting the assignment of resources (ports, memory, IRQs, DMA)  
modify the server’s boot device order or security settings  
change the server configuration settings  
save and restore the server configuration  
view or clear the SEL  
view FRU information  
view the SDR table  
If you install or remove an ISA add-in board, you must run the SSU to reconfigure the server.  
Running the SSU is optional for a PCI and ISA Plug and Play add-in boards.  
The SSU is PCI-aware, and it complies with the ISA Plug and Play specifications. The SSU works  
with any compliant configuration (.CFG) file supplied by the peripheral device manufacturer.  
The I/O baseboard comes with a .CFG file. The .CFG file describes the characteristics of the  
board and the system resources that it requires. The configuration registers on PCI and ISA Plug  
and Play add-in boards contain the same type of information that is in a .CFG file. Some ISA  
boards also come with a .CFG file.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
The SSU uses the information provided by .CFG files, configuration registers, flash memory, and  
the information that you enter, to specify a system configuration. The SSU writes the  
configuration information to flash memory.  
The SSU stores configuration values in flash memory. These values take effect when you boot the  
server. POST checks the values against the actual hardware configuration; if they do not agree,  
POST generates an error message. You must then run the SSU to specify the correct configuration  
before the server boots.  
The SSU always includes a checksum with the configuration data so that the BIOS can detect any  
potential data corruption before the actual hardware configuration takes place.  
What You Need to Do  
The SSU may be run directly from the Server Configuration Software CD or from a set of DOS  
diskettes. If you choose to run the SSU from a set diskettes, you must copy the SSU from the  
Server Configuration Software CD to diskettes and follow the instructions in the README.TXT  
of diskette one. See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” to create a set of SSU  
diskettes. Only diskette one of the set must be DOS bootable.  
NOTE  
✏
If your diskette drive is disabled, or improperly configured, you must use the  
flash-resident Setup utility to enable it so that you can use the SSU. If  
necessary, you can disable the drive after you exit the SSU. Information  
entered using the SSU overrides any entered using Setup.  
Running the SSU  
•
Running the SSU Locally  
Running the ssu.bat file provided on the SSU media starts the SSU. If the server boots directly  
from the SSU media, the ssu.bat file runs automatically. If it boots from a different media, the  
SSU can be started manually or by another application. When the SSU starts in the local  
execution mode (the default mode), the SSU accepts input from the keyboard and/or mouse.  
The SSU presents a VGA-based Graphical User Interface (GUI) on the primary monitor.  
The SSU runs from writable, nonwritable, removable, and nonremovable media. If you run the  
SSU from nonwritable media, all your preference settings will be lost because you cannot save  
them.  
The SSU supports the ROM-DOS V6.22 operating system. It can run on other ROM-DOS  
compatible operating systems but they are not supported. The SSU will not operate from a  
DOS-box running under an operating system such as Windows.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
•
Running the SSU Remotely  
To run the SSU remotely, you must invoke the SSU.BAT file with the /t switch and redirect  
the text-mode output via BIOS console redirection. The /t switch puts the display in text mode  
and allows the console to be viewed and controlled via BIOS console redirection.  
First, configure the server for BIOS console redirection. Then configure the modem to  
auto-answer and to “modem reaction to DTR set to return to command state.” After  
configuring the server, it should be booted to a DOS prompt either locally or remotely through  
the EMP. Once the server boots, the remote user can use any ANSI terminal emulation  
program to connect to the configured COM port and invoke SSU /t. This process requires a  
bootable DOS partition, and all files required for the SSU to run must be on the server.  
Starting the SSU  
The SSU consists of a collection of task-oriented modules plugged into a common framework  
called the Application Framework (AF). The AF provides a launching point for individual tasks  
and a location for setting customization information.  
1. Turn on your video monitor and your system.  
2. There are two ways to start the SSU.  
a. From a set of SSU diskettes created from the CD: Insert SSU diskette 1 in drive A, and  
press the push-button reset switch or <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to reboot your server from the  
diskette. Follow the screen prompts.  
b. From the Server Configuration Software CD: Insert the CD into your CD-ROM drive,  
and press the reset switch on the front panel or <Ctrl+Alt+Del> to reboot the server.  
•
•
When prompted, press <F2> to enter BIOS Setup.  
From the Boot Menu, select the Boot Device Priority option, and then select the  
CD-ROM drive as your primary boot device.  
•
•
•
•
Press <F10> to save the new settings.  
Press <Enter> to exit BIOS Setup and boot from the CD.  
From the CD menu, select Run Utilities and press <Enter>.  
Select Run System Setup Utility, and press <Enter>. Follow the screen prompts.  
If you boot from the CD, skip to step 4.  
3. The mouse driver loads if it is available; press <Enter> to continue.  
4. When the main window of the SSU appears, you can customize the user interface before  
continuing.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Customizing the SSU  
The SSU lets you customize the user interface according to your preferences. The AF sets these  
preferences and saves them in the AF.INI file so that they take effect the next time you start the  
SSU. There are four user-customizable settings.  
NOTE  
✏
If you run the SSU from nonwritable media like a CD, these preferences will  
be lost when you exit the SSU.  
•
•
Color—this button lets you change the default colors associated with different items on the  
screen with predefined color combinations. The color changes are instantaneous.  
Mode—this button lets you set the desired expertise level.  
novice  
intermediate  
expert  
The expertise level determines which tasks are visible in the Available Tasks section and what  
actions each task performs. For a new mode setting to take effect, the user must exit the SSU  
and restart it.  
•
•
Language—this button lets you change the strings in the SSU to strings of the appropriate  
language. For a new language setting to take effect, you must exit the SSU and restart it.  
Other—this button lets you change other miscellaneous options in the SSU. The changes are  
instantaneous.  
To change the interface default values:  
Use the mouse to click on the proper button in the Preferences section of the SSU Main  
window.  
or  
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the desired button, and press the spacebar or <Enter>.  
or  
Access the menu bar with the mouse or hot keys (Alt + underlined letter).  
Launching a Task  
It is possible to have many tasks open at the same time, although some tasks may require complete  
control to avoid possible conflicts. The tasks achieve complete control by keeping the task as the  
center of operation until you close the task window.  
To launch a task:  
1. In the SSU Main window, double-click on the task name under Available Tasks to display the  
main window for the selected task.  
or  
Highlight the task name, and click on OK.  
or  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Use the tab and arrow keys to highlight the task name, and press the <spacebar> or <Enter>.  
Figure 5-1. System Setup Utility Main Window  
Resource Configuration Add-in (RCA) Window  
The RCA provides three major functions:  
•
•
•
Creates representations of devices that cannot be discovered by the system (ISA cards)  
Modifies the contents of the system by adding and removing devices  
Modifies the resources used by devices  
You can use the RCA window to define an ISA card or add an ISA card by clicking on the  
appropriate button. Removing an ISA card requires that the card be highlighted in the Devices  
section of the screen before clicking on the button.  
NOTE  
✏
You can only add as many ISA cards as you have available ISA slots in the  
server.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
1. From the SSU main window, launch the RCA by selecting the Resources task under the RCA  
heading in the task box.  
2. When the RCA window appears, it displays messages similar to the following:  
Baseboard: System Board  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 00 –- Host Processor Bridge  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0D –- SCSI Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 0F –- Ethernet Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 12 –- Multifunction Controller  
PCI Card: Bus 00 dev 14 –- VGA Controller  
3. To configure a device, select its name in the Devices section of the RCA window, and press  
the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the name.  
4. It is possible to close the RCA window and return to the AF by clicking on the Back to AF  
button. Any changes made will be kept in memory for use by the RCA when it is rerun.  
5. Save all the changes made by clicking on the Save button. Saving writes your current  
configuration to nonvolatile storage where it will be available to the system after every reboot.  
6. Closing the window by clicking on the system menu—the dash in the upper-left corner—  
discards all changes.  
Figure 5-2. RCA Window  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Defining an ISA Card  
An ISA card usually comes with a vendor-created .CFG file that specifies the resources the card  
requires to function properly. If the .CFG file is unavailable, you must manually create it or define  
the card through the SSU. Defining an ISA card consists of specifying the name of the card and  
the resources it consumes. This allows the RCA to consider the ISA card resource requirements  
when the RCA tries to resolve conflicts. The system BIOS also uses the information to configure  
the hardware when the system boots.  
1. To add or remove ISA card resources, click on the appropriate resource buttons, select the  
desired value, and click on Add or Remove.  
2. After you complete the necessary information, click on Save.  
3. To edit a card, click on Load to retrieve the card information. After making changes, click on  
Save.  
4. To create a card, click on New.  
5. To remove a current definition of a card, click on Delete.  
Figure 5-3. Define ISA Window  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Adding and Removing ISA Cards  
Adding and removing cards through the RCA provides a way for the RCA to run its conflict  
detection algorithms on the resources requested by the cards. This alerts you to any possible  
problems with that particular card in the current configuration.  
•
To add an ISA card:  
1. Click on Add ISA Card in the RCA window.  
2. Specify the directory for the .CFG file.  
3. Select the file and click on Ok.  
•
To remove an ISA card:  
1. Select a valid ISA card in the Devices section of the RCA window.  
2. Click on Remove ISA Card.  
Modifying Resources  
Modifying the resources of a device may be necessary to accommodate certain operating systems,  
applications, and drivers. It may also be necessary to modify resources to resolve a conflict.  
•
To modify the resources associated with a device:  
1. Highlight the device in the Devices section of the RCA window.  
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the entry.  
This displays the functions of the selected device along with possible choices and the resources  
associated with those choices.  
•
To make a modification:  
1. Highlight the function in the Configuration window.  
2. Press the spacebar or <Enter>, or double-click on the entry (this updates the Choice and  
resource lists).  
3. Press the tab key to get to the Choice list, and press <Enter>.  
4. Use the arrow keys to select a proper choice, and press <Enter> again.  
5. If the choice allows multiple possible values for a particular resource, use the hot key to  
select a resource, and press the spacebar or double-click on the resource.  
6. Select the desired resource, and click on Ok.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Figure 5-4. Configuration Window  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
System Resource Usage  
Clicking on the Resource Use button in the Configuration window displays the System Resource  
Usage window. This window shows what resources each device is consuming. This information  
is useful for choosing resources if a conflict occurs. Devices can be organized according to the  
resources you want to examine using the options in the Resource section of the screen. The  
resource information can also be written to a plain text file though this window.  
Figure 5-5. System Resource Usage Window  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Multiboot Add-in  
The Multiboot Add-in (MBA) provides an interface for selecting Initial Program Load (IPL)  
devices. Using the MBA, you can identify all IPL devices in the system and prioritize their boot  
order. On power-up, the BIOS sequentially attempts to boot from each device.  
To change the boot device priority:  
1. Click on the device to select it.  
2. Click on the Move Up button to move the device up.  
3. Click on Move Down button to move the device down.  
4. Click on the Save button to save the boot order in the system nonvolatile storage.  
Figure 5-6. Multiboot Main Window  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Security Add-in  
The Security Add-in (PWA) provides security and password support options. Within the PWA,  
you can either set or modify the User and Administrator passwords or update any of the various  
security options available.  
To Set the User Password  
1. Click on the user password button.  
2. Enter the password in the first field.  
3. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field.  
To Change or Clear the User Password  
1. Click on the User password button.  
2. Enter the old password in the first field.  
3. Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password.  
4. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the  
password.  
To Set the Administrator Password  
1. Click on the Administrator password button.  
2. Enter the password in the first field.  
3. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field.  
To Change or Clear the Administrator Password  
1. Click on the Administrator password button.  
2. Enter the old password in the first field.  
3. Enter the new password in the second field or leave it blank to clear the password.  
4. Verify the password by entering it again in the second field or leave it blank to clear the  
password.  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Security Options  
Under this window, you can set the other security options:  
•
•
Hot Key—set a key sequence that, when pressed, will drop the server into secure mode.  
Lock-Out Timer—set an interval that, if no activity takes place during it, will drop the server  
into secure mode.  
•
•
•
•
Secure Boot Mode—force the server to boot directly into secure mode.  
Video Blanking—turn off the video when the server is in secure mode.  
Floppy Write—control access to the diskette drive while the server is in secure mode.  
Front Panel Lockout—control the power and reset buttons while the server is in secure mode.  
Figure 5-7. Password Main Window  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
System Event Log Manager Add-in  
Clicking on the SEL Manger add-in task brings up the SEL Manager window. It lets you examine  
SEL records:  
•
•
•
via the Baseboard Management Controller (BMC) in hex or verbose mode  
by sensor type or event type in hex or verbose mode  
from a previously stored binary file in hex or verbose mode  
The SEL Manager window also lets you:  
•
•
save the SEL records to a file in either text or binary form  
clear the SEL entries from the nonvolatile storage area  
SEL Manager Menus  
File  
Click on  
Load SEL  
Save SEL  
Clear SEL  
Exit  
to  
view data from a previously saved SEL file  
save the currently loaded SEL data to a file  
clear the SEL data from the BMC  
quit the SEL Viewer  
View  
SEL Info  
display information about the SEL (these fields are  
display only)  
All Events  
By Sensor  
display the current SEL data from the BMC  
bring up a pop-up menu that allows you to load only the  
data from a certain sensor type  
By Event  
bring up a pop-up menu that allows you to load only the  
data from a certain event type  
View Realtime  
Display HEX  
Settings  
toggle between the Hex/interpreted mode of displaying  
the SEL records  
Display Verbose  
Output Binary  
determine whether SEL data will be saved to the file (as  
under File - Save) in binary format or verbose format  
Output Text  
About  
Help  
display the SEL Viewer version information  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Figure 5-8. System Event Log Main Window  
Sensor Data Record (SDR) Manager Add-In  
In this window, you can:  
•
•
•
•
Examine all SDR records through the BMC (in either Hex or Verbose mode)  
Examine SDR records by Record type (in either Hex or Verbose mode)  
Examine SDR records from a previously stored binary file (in either Hex or Verbose mode)  
Save the SDR records to a file (in either text or binary form)  
The SDR Manager can display SDR records in either raw form (hexadecimal) or in an interpreted,  
easy-to-understand textual form (verbose).  
The SDR Manager’s main window provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each  
option included on the main menu supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by  
an underlined letter in the text listing the option.  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Menu  
Click On  
To  
File  
Open FRU  
Save SDR  
Exit  
Opens FRU data from a previously saved file  
Saves SDR data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format  
Quits the SDR Manager  
View  
SDR Info  
Displays SDR information as returned by the GetSDRInfo interface  
of the BMC  
All Records  
By Record  
Displays all records in the SDR repository  
Displays all records in the SDR repository, sorted by record type  
Settings Display HEX  
Display Verbose  
Output Text  
Displays SDR records in Hex format  
Displays SDR records in verbose format  
Saves SDR data in verbose format  
Saves SDR data in binary format  
Output Binary  
Help  
About  
Displays SDR Manager version information  
Figure 5-9. SDR Manager Main Window  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 5 System System Setup Utility: When to Run  
Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) Manager  
In this window you can:  
•
•
•
Examine all FRU Inventory areas on the server (in either Hex or Verbose mode)  
Examine individual FRU Inventory areas (in either Hex or Verbose mode)  
Examine FRU Inventory areas from a previously stored binary file (in either Hex or Verbose  
mode)  
•
Save the FRU Inventory areas to a file (in either text or binary form)  
The FRU Manager can display the FRU Inventory areas in either raw form (hexadecimal) or in an  
interpreted, easy-to-understand textual form (verbose). The FRU manager’s main window  
provides access to features of the add-in through menus. Each option included on the main menu  
supports an accelerator key. Accelerator keys are indicated by an underlined letter in the text  
listing the option.  
Menu  
Click On  
To  
File  
Open FRU  
Save FRU  
Exit  
Opens FRU data from a previously saved file  
Saves FRU data to a file in binary raw or verbose text format  
Quits the FRU Manager  
View  
FRU Info  
All FRU Areas  
By Device Type  
Displays FRU information of the selected device  
Displays FRU areas of all devices  
Displays FRU areas sorted by device type  
Settings Display HEX  
Display Verbose  
Output Text  
Displays FRU areas in Hex format  
Displays FRU areas in verbose format  
Saves FRU data in verbose format  
Saves FRU data in binary format  
Output Binary  
Help  
About  
Displays FRU Manager version information  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Figure 5-10. FRU Manager Main Window  
Exiting the SSU  
Exiting the SSU causes all windows to close.  
1. Exit the SSU by opening the menu bar item File in the SSU Main window. See “System Setup  
Utility Main Window” on page 61.  
2. Click on Exit.  
or  
Highlight Exit, and press <Enter>.  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6 SCSI Configuration Utility  
The SCSI configuration utility allows you to configure/view the settings of the host adapters and  
devices in the server. For information about the SCSI Configuration Utility refer to the PCI SCSI  
Device Manager System Users Guide.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7 Emergency Management Port Console:  
How to Use  
The Emergency Management Port (EMP) Console provides an interface to the Emergency  
Management Port (EMP). This interface allows remote server management via a modem or direct  
connection.  
The server control operations available with EMP Console are:  
•
•
•
Connecting to remote servers  
Powering the server on or off  
Resetting the server  
The EMP Console uses three management plug-ins to monitor the server:  
•
•
•
SEL Viewer (not available on AC450NX servers)  
SDR Viewer (not available on AC450NX servers)  
FRU Viewer  
The EMP Console also has a Phonebook plug-in that can be used to create and maintain a list of  
servers and their phone numbers.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
How EMP Console Works  
The EMP shares use of the COM 2 port with the system on the server. When the EMP has control  
of the port, the port operates in command mode. When the system has control, the port operates in  
console redirect mode. When connecting to a server, the EMP Console checks to determine the  
mode of the COM 2 port. The following discussion covers how EMP Console functions in each  
mode:  
•
Command mode is the default COM 2 state. In this state, EMP Console communicates with  
the server’s firmware, allowing the client to remotely reset or power the server up or down.  
The client can also view the server’s System Event Log (SEL), Field Replaceable Unit (FRU)  
information, or Sensor Data Record (SDR) table.  
•
In console redirect mode, EMP Console serves as a PC ANSI terminal window for BIOS  
console redirection. Commands typed in this terminal window are transmitted through BIOS  
to the server’s console, and text displayed on the server console is displayed on the EMP  
Console’s terminal window. In this mode, you can remotely view boot messages, access BIOS  
setup, and run DOS text mode applications through the EMP Console’s terminal window.  
Figure 7-1. EMP Console in Command State  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
Figure 7-2. EMP Console in Redirect State  
Figure 7-2 shows the EMP Console window in redirect mode with the terminal window. The text  
that appears on the server monitor displays in the Redirect window.  
Availability of the various EMP Console features are determined by two factors: the BIOS EMP  
access mode and whether the server’s COM 2 port is configured for console redirection. The three  
EMP access modes are: disabled, pre-boot, and always active.  
Table 7-1. EMP Console Access Modes (Server configured for console redirection)  
Mode  
Server is powered off  
During POST  
After OS boots  
Disabled  
Redirect window appears,  
but is blank  
Redirect window  
Redirect window  
Pre-boot  
EMP commands available  
Redirect window*  
Redirect window*  
Redirect window  
Always Active EMP commands available  
EMP commands available  
* The operation mode can be modified by selections in the Reset and Power on/off dialogs. These are server control  
dialogs available in EMP Console.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Table 7-2. EMP Console Access Modes (Server not configured for console redirection)  
Mode  
Server is powered off  
During POST  
After OS boots  
Disabled  
Redirect window appears,  
but is blank  
Redirect window appears,  
but is blank  
Redirect window appears,  
but is blank  
Pre-boot  
EMP commands available  
EMP commands available  
Redirect window appears,  
but is blank  
Always Active  
EMP commands available  
EMP commands available  
EMP commands available  
Requirements  
This section outlines the requirements and configurations necessary for using EMP Console.  
Operating Systems:  
•
•
Windows 95  
16 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended  
20 MB disk space  
Windows NT†  
Windows NT 4.0  
24 MB of RAM, 32 MB recommended  
20 MB disk space  
Client Configuration: EMP Console supports all COM ports on the client system, along with any  
Windows NT/95 compatible modem.  
Server Configuration: EMP Console requires the server’s COM 2 port to be connected to an  
external modem or directly connected to a serial cable.  
Direct Connect Configuration: A null modem serial cable is needed. Connect one end of the  
cable to the COM 2 port of server and the other to a port on the client machine.  
Modem Configuration: On the client, EMP Console uses the Windows Application Program  
Interface (API) to determine if a modem is connected and available. The EMP Console does not  
configure the modem; it should be preconfigured through Windows.  
For modem support, the server must use a Hayes compatible modem that supports a baud rate  
of 19.2k. The modem must be on the NT Hardware Compatibility List provided by Microsoft.  
The server modem must be set in auto-answer mode for EMP Console to be able to connect to it.  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
Setting Up the Server for the EMP  
To use the EMP, you must configure the server’s BIOS with specific settings. These settings are  
found in the BIOS Server menu and the Console Redirection submenu. The BIOS settings  
section, found earlier in this document, shows all the available options. This section focuses on the  
settings that must be configured in order to use the EMP.  
Server Menu  
All EMP related settings occur in the Server main menu. Change only the items below; all other  
default settings should remain the same.  
EMP Password Switch & EMP Password: Anytime an attempt to initiate a connection is made,  
a prompt for the user password appears. If no EMP password is setup, then anyone can access the  
EMP by clicking OK.  
In the EMP Password area of the Server menu, the EMP Password Switch option must be set to  
enable. Then type in a password of up to eight alphanumeric characters. If a beep is heard, the  
password was accepted.  
EMP Access Modes: Choose either Disabled, Pre-boot, or Always Active, depending on the type  
of EMP access needed. The tables above show what is available with a given setting.  
EMP Restricted Mode Access: Set Restricted Mode to either enabled or disabled as needed. If in  
enabled mode, this means that EMP Console’s server control options, Power off and Reset, are  
unavailable, except power on. In disabled mode, these same server control options are available.  
EMP Direct Connect/Modem Mode: Select Direct Connect if a null modem serial cable directly  
connects the server’s COM 2 port to the EMP Console client machine. If they are connected via a  
modem, select Modem Mode.  
Console Redirection Submenu  
The settings in the Console Redirection Submenu of the Server menu must be set exactly as noted  
to be able to use the EMP.  
COM Port Address: Select 2F8. This is the COM 2 port that must be used by the EMP. The  
IRQ# setting is automatically populated with the correct number based on the COM Port Address  
choice.  
Baud Rate: Select 19.2k.  
Flow Control: Select CTS/RTS + CD.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Main EMP Console Window  
The main EMP Console window provides a graphical user interface (GUI) to access server control  
operations and to launch the management plug-ins. At the top of the window is the menu and tool  
bar. These provide the options to initiate plug-ins and other support features. A status bar at the  
bottom displays connection information such as server name, line status, and mode.  
Toolbar  
The tool bar buttons of the EMP Console main window combine server control and management  
plug-in commands available from both the Connect and Action menus as follows:  
Displays the Connect dialog to allow connection to a selected server.  
Disconnects from the currently connected server.  
Displays the Power On/Off dialog.  
Displays the Reset dialog.  
Launches the SEL Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)  
Launches the SDR Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)  
Launches the FRU Viewer.  
Displays the Phonebook Dialog.  
Displays the online help.  
Status Bar  
The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the main window. It contains the following status  
information:  
•
•
•
SERVER NAME: the name of the connected server when connecting via modem.  
LINE: the type of line connection. This is either direct or modem.  
MODE: either Redirect of EMP, depending on whether the EMP has control of the COM 2  
port.  
•
LINE STATUS: gives status information about the server connection. For example, if a  
server is connected, the status bar says "Connected." Otherwise, the line is blank.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
EMP Console Main Menu  
•
File  
Exit - Exits EMP Console  
Connect  
Disconnect - disconnects the server connection.  
•
[Re]Connect - displays the connect dialog.  
A list of the five most recent modem connections. Click on one of these server names to  
initiate a connection.  
•
Action  
Power On/Off - displays the Power on/off dialog.  
Reset - displays the Reset dialog.  
SEL Viewer - displays the SEL Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)  
SDR Viewer - displays the SDR Viewer. (not available on AC450NX servers)  
FRU Viewer - displays the FRU Viewer.  
Phonebook - displays the Phonebook dialog.  
• Help  
Help Topics - help topics for EMP Console.  
Help About - provides version information.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server Control Operations  
Three server control operations are available from the menu or toolbar in EMP Console: remote  
server connection, powering the server on and off, and resetting the server. The server console  
mode can also be switched between EMP active and BIOS redirect modes through post-power-up  
and reset options.  
Connect  
When [Re]Connect is selected from the Connect menu, the Connect dialog in Figure 7-3 is  
displayed. This dialog allows you to connect to a server. If the client machine is already  
connected to a server, initiating connection generates a warning message. The message indicates  
that the existing connection will be terminated if you continue trying to initiate the new  
connection. You are prompted to enter the EMP password whenever a connection is attempted.  
Figure 7-3. Connect Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
•
Line Selection - you can specify whether to use a direct connection or dial-up modem  
connection to the server.  
Dial-up - connects to a selected server with a modem.  
Direct connect (Serial Line) - connects to the selected server directly using a null modem  
serial cable.  
•
•
Server - a server name can be selected from the dropdown list of available servers. A server  
must be selected when the line selection is Dial-up.  
Serial Line - These options are enabled when the line selection is set to Direct connect (Serial  
Line).  
Baud Rate - must be 19200 for EMP to connect properly.  
COM Port No. - set the COM Port number to the port which the null modem serial cable  
is connected to.  
•
Connect - initiates the connection to the connected server. When this button is clicked, you  
are prompted for the EMP password.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
•
•
•
Config - displays the Phonebook dialog.  
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.  
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.  
Power On/Off  
Selecting Power On/Off from the Action menu displays the Power on/off dialog. This dialog  
provides commands to remotely power on or power off the server.  
Figure 7-4. Power On/Off Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
•
•
Power ON - powers on the server.  
Power OFF - powers off the server. This option is not allowed if the server is configured in  
RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations.  
•
Post-power-up option - sets the mode selection of the server to EMP active or BIOS  
redirection. The setting is available after the next power-up. The default selection is EMP  
active.  
•
•
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.  
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Reset  
Selecting Reset from the Action menu displays the Reset dialog. This dialog provides the ability  
to remotely reset the server with post-reset options.  
Figure 7-5. Reset Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
•
System Reset - resets the server with the selected post-reset options. This operation is not  
allowed if the server is configured in RESTRICTED mode for EMP operations.  
Post-reset option - sets the post-reset option that will be in effect after reset. The options are  
EMP active or BIOS redirection. The default selection is EMP active.  
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.  
•
•
•
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 7 Emergency Management Port Console: How to Use  
Phonebook  
EMP Console provides a support plug-in known as Phonebook. It stores names and numbers of  
servers in a list that can be updated by adding, modifying or deleting entries. Phonebook can be  
opened from the main menu and toolbar, or launched from the Connect dialog by clicking the  
Config button.  
Figure 7-6. Phonebook Dialog  
Options available in the dialog are:  
•
•
•
Server - a dropdown list of server names stored in Phonebook. If the New radio button is  
selected in the Operation area, this area is cleared.  
Phone No. - the number of the selected server. If the New radio button is selected in the  
Operation area, this area is cleared.  
Operation  
New - lets you add a new entry in the Phonebook. Selecting this option clears the Server  
and Phone No. fields. You must click Save for the entry to be added to the Phonebook.  
Modify - lets you edit an existing entry. You must select an existing entry from the Server  
dropdown list box and modify the existing phone number before selecting this option.  
Click Save in order to update the entry in the phonebook.  
Delete - lets you delete an entry from the Phonebook. You must first select an existing  
server from the Server dropdown list box before selecting this option. You must click  
Save for the entry to be deleted.  
•
•
Save - saves a new or modified Phonebook entry, or deletes an entry if the Delete radio button  
is selected.  
Connect - displays the Connect dialog with the server from the Phonebook’s Server dropdown  
list box already populating the Connect dialog’s Server field.  
•
•
Cancel - exits the Connect dialog without taking any action.  
Help - displays the help information for this dialog.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
FRU Viewer  
The FRU Viewer allows you to view the server’s FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) data from the  
server’s Front Panel FRU information area. The options available in the FRU Viewer are:  
•
•
•
•
•
View all FRU records  
View FRU summary info  
Set FRU display mode to either Hex or verbose mode  
Close the FRU Viewer  
Exit EMP Console  
FRU Viewer Menu Options  
The following menu options are found on the FRU Viewer menu bar:  
•
File  
Close - closes the FRU Viewer.  
Exit - exits EMP Console.  
•
View  
Display all Records - displays all FRU data, which consists of chassis, board, and product  
information.  
FRU Info - displays the FRU summary information as returned by the server.  
Settings - lets you change operating parameters for the FRU Viewer. This menu displays the  
following options:  
Display HEX/Verbose - toggles between HEX mode and interpreted mode of displaying  
FRU records.  
Window - gives options for displaying currently open windows.  
•
•
• Help  
Help Topics - help topics for EMP Console.  
Help About - provides version information.  
This page is blank  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
The Field Replacement Unit (FRU) and Sensor Data Record (SDR) Load Utility is a DOS based  
program used to update the server management subsystem’s product level FRU, SDR, and the  
Desktop Management Interface (DMI) nonvolatile storage components (EEPROMs). The  
load utility:  
•
•
•
discovers the product configuration based on instructions in a master configuration file  
displays the FRU information (it may have values the user can change)  
updates the nonvolatile storage device (EEPROM) associated with the Baseboard Management  
Controller (BMC) that holds the SDR and FRU area  
•
•
updates the DMI area located in the BIOS nonvolatile storage device  
generically handles FRU devices that may not be associated with the BMC  
When to Run the FRUSDR Load Utility  
The FRUSDR Load Utility can be used to:  
•
•
•
Read the system FRU and SDR information.  
Load the FRU information using the configuration file.  
Update the sensor data records after adding or removing processors in your server. It  
programs the sensors that need to be monitored for server management.  
Enter the Asset Tag after upgrade/replacement of the PHP I/O baseboard.  
•
The server must be rebooted to properly initialize the sensors after programming the Sensor Data  
Records. To do this, turn the server off and disconnect the AC power cords from the server power  
supplies. Wait approximately 30 seconds, reconnect the power cords, and turn the server on.  
What You Need to Do  
The FRUSDR Load Utility may be run directly from the Configuration Software CD or from  
diskettes you create from the CD. Before you can run the FRUSDR Load Utility from a diskette,  
you must copy the utility from the Server Configuration Software CD to a DOS-bootable diskette.  
See Chapter 2, “On-site Installation: Installing the Server,” to create an FRUSDR Load Utility  
diskette.  
NOTE  
✏
If your diskette drive is disabled, or improperly configured, you must use  
BIOS Setup to enable it. If necessary, you can disable the drive after you are  
done with the FRUSDR utility.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
How You Use the FRUSDR Load Utility  
This utility is compatible with ROM-DOS Ver. 6.22, MS-DOS Ver. 6.22, and later versions. The  
utility accepts CFG, SDR and FRU load files. The executable file for the utility is frusdr.exe. The  
utility requires the following supporting files:  
•
•
•
one or more .fru files describing the system’s field replaceable units  
a .cfg file describing the system configuration  
a .sdr file describing the sensors in the system  
Command Line Format  
The basic command line format is:  
frusdr [-?] [-h] [-d {dmi, fru, sdr}] [-cfg filename.cfg] -p -v  
Command  
Description  
frusdr  
Is the name of the utility.  
Displays usage information.  
Only displays requested area.  
Uses custom CFG file.  
-? or -h  
-d {dmi, fru, sdr}  
-cfg filename.cfg  
-p  
-v  
Pause between blocks of data.  
Verbose, display any additional details.  
Parsing the Command Line  
The FRUSDR Load Utility allows only one command line function at a time. A command line  
function may consist of two parameters; for example, -cfg filename.cfg. Any invalid parameters  
result in displaying an error message and exiting the program. You can use either a slash (/) or a  
minus sign (-) to specify command line options. The -p and -v options may be used in conjunction  
with any of the other options.  
Displaying Usage Information  
When the utility is run with the -? or -h command line flags, the following message is displayed  
when the verbose flag -v is added to the help command:  
FRU & SDR Load Utility Version 2.0  
Usage: frusdr  
-? Or -h  
Is the name of the utility.  
Displays usage information.  
Only displays requested area.  
Uses custom CFG file.  
-d {dmi,fru,sdr}  
-cfg filename.cfg  
-p  
-v  
Pause between blocks of data.  
Verbose, display any additional details.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
Copyright (c) 1998, Intel Corporation, All Rights Reserved  
This utility must be run from a system executing DOS. Running in a Window’s  
DOS box is insufficient and will provide incorrect results. Programming the  
BMC FRU area clears the SDR table, therefore the SDR table must be  
reprogrammed. Upon completing the programming of the FRU and SDR areas, the  
server should be rebooted.  
Note: DOS users may alternatively use a ’/’ instead of the ’-’.  
The following information is display if -v option is included in the command line.  
The /D FRU command may be followed with up to 16 device addresses. These  
device addresses are used to view up to 16 different FRU areas, instead of  
the default of displaying the BMC FRU. The arguments following the "-d FRU"  
are in the same order and value as the NVS_TYPE, NVS_LUN, DEV_BUS and  
DEV_ADDRESS which are found in the FRU file header in each FRU file. The  
LUN address is optional. If the LUN address is used, it must start with  
an ’L’.  
Usage:  
FRUSDR -d fru (device) [lun] (bus) (addr) (addr2) (etc)  
Example: FRUSDR /D FRU IMBDEVICE L00 00 C0 C2  
The configuration file may be used to load multiple FRU and SDR files.  
In the configuration file, you may define which FRU and SDR areas are to  
be programmed. Additionally, you may request information from the user  
or ask the user to choose which areas to program.  
To read this area  
Enter this command line  
I/O Baseboard FRU  
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE FF 20  
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE 00 22  
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 98  
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 9A  
frusdr -d fru DS1624S 01 9E  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 01 A2  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 01 AE  
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE L02 00 22  
frusdr -d fru IMBDEVICE 00 C0  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A0  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A4  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 A8  
frusdr -d fru AT24C02 03 AC  
Front Panel FRU  
CPU baseboard FRU  
Top Mem Mod FRU  
Bottom Mem Mod FRU  
Interconnect Backplane FRU  
I/O Riser FRU  
Power Distribution Backplane FUR  
SCSI Hot Swap Backplane FRU  
Term card in Slot 1  
Term card in Slot 2  
Term card in Slot 3  
Term card in Slot 4  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Displaying a Given Area  
When the utility is run with the -d DMI, -d FRU, or -d SDR command line flag, the indicated area  
is displayed. Each area represents a sensor; one sensor for each instrumented device in the server.  
If the given display function fails because of an inability to parse the data present or a hardware  
failure, the utility displays an error message and exits.  
Displaying DMI Area  
Each DMI area displayed is headed with the DMI area designated name. In each area, each field  
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number.  
Example:  
To display the DMI area, type frusdr -d dmi -v -pand press <Enter>. A message similar to the  
following appears:  
Displaying DMI Area...  
System Information (Type 1, 8 bytes)  
Manufacturer = Intel  
Product  
Version  
= AC450NX Server System  
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
Serial Number = Z00418630  
Board Information (Type 2, 8 bytes)  
Manufacturer = Intel Corp.  
Product  
Version  
= AC450NX Server System  
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
Serial Number = 0123456789  
Chassis Information (Type 3, 9 bytes)  
Manufacturer = Intel  
Type  
= Main Server Chassis  
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
Version  
Serial Number = Z00418630  
Asset Tag#  
=
Displaying FRU Area  
The FRU area is displayed in ASCII format when the field is ASCII or as a number when the field  
is a number. Each FRU area displayed is headed with the FRU area designated name. Each field  
has a field name header followed by the field in ASCII or as a number. The Board, Chassis, and  
Product FRU areas end with an END OF FIELDS CODE that indicates there is no more data in  
this area. The Internal Use area is displayed in hex format, 16 bytes per line.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
Example:  
To display the FRU area, type frusdr -d fruand press <Enter>. A message similar to the  
following appears:  
Common Header Area (Version 1, Length 8)  
Header Area Version = 01h  
Internal Area Offset = 01h  
Chassis Area Offset = 0Ah  
Board Area Offset  
= 0Eh  
Product Area Offset = 16h  
PAD  
= 00h  
= 00h  
= D0h  
PAD  
CHECKSUM  
Internal Information Area (Version 0, Length 72)  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
Chassis Information Area (Version 1, Length 32)  
Chassis Type  
= 11h  
Part Number (ASCII) = ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
Serial Number (ASCII)= Z00418630  
END OF FIELDS CODE  
Board Information Area (Version 1, Length 64)  
Unicode Country Base  
Manufacturing Time (mins)  
Manufacturer Name (ASCII)  
Product Name (ASCII)  
Serial Number (ASCII)  
Part Number (ASCII)  
= 00h  
= 733803  
= Intel  
= AC450NX Server System  
= 0123456789  
= 664653-001  
END OF FIELDS CODE  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Product Information Area (Version 1, Length 80)  
Unicode Country Base  
Manufacturer Name (ASCII)  
Product Name (ASCII)  
Part Number (ASCII)  
Version (ASCII)  
= 00h  
= Intel  
= AC450NX Server System  
= ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
=
Serial Number (ASCII)  
Asset Tag (ASCII)  
= 0123456789  
=
END OF FIELDS CODE  
Displaying SDR Area  
The SDR nonvolatile storage area is displayed in the following hex format. The data is separated  
by a Sensor Record Number X header, where X is the number of that sensor record in the SDR  
area. The next line after the header is the sensor record data in hex format delineated by spaces.  
Each line holds up to 16 bytes. The data on each line is followed by the same data in ASCII  
format; nonprintable characters are substituted by a period (.).  
Example:  
To display the SDR area, type frusdr -d sdrand press <Enter>. A message similar to the  
following appears:  
Reading SDR Record #1  
0E 00 10 01 37 20 00 0F 05 00 10 F1 F8 02 01 85  
02 00 00 00 04 00 00 C4 02 00 08 30 C2 07 91 95  
8E FF 00 1B 1B 00 99 95 00 8A 8E 02 02 00 01 CC  
53 43 53 49 2D 42 2D 54 65 72 6D 33  
....7..........  
...........0....  
................  
SCSI-B-Term3  
Reading SDR Record #2  
0E 40 10 01 30 20 00 13 05 00 10 F1 F8 04 01 05  
[email protected] ..........  
00 00 00 20 29 00 00 1E 02 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 ... )...........  
00 FF 00 03 03 00 00 00 00 42 49 02 02 00 01 C5  
46 41 4E 2D 32  
.........BI.....  
FAN-2  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 8 FRU and SDR Load Utility: When to Run  
Using Specified CFG File  
The utility can be run with the command line parameter of -cfg filename.cfg. The filename can be  
any DOS accepted, eight-character filename string. The utility loads the specified CFG file and  
uses the entries in the configuration file to probe the hardware and to select the proper SDRs to  
load into nonvolatile storage.  
Displaying Utility Title and Version  
The utility displays its title:  
FRU & SDR Load Utility, Version xx.xx  
Configuration File  
The configuration file is in ASCII text. The utility executes commands formed by the strings  
present in the configuration file. These commands cause the utility to perform various tasks  
needed to ultimately load the proper SDRs into the nonvolatile storage of the BMC and possibly  
generic FRU devices. Because some of the commands are interactive, you are required to make a  
choice.  
Prompting for Product Level FRU Information  
Through the use of a configuration file, the utility may prompt the user for FRU information.  
Filtering Sensor Data Record From the SDR File  
The MASTER.SDR file has all the possible SDRs for the system. These records may need to be  
filtered based on the current product configuration. The configuration file directs the filtering of  
the SDRs.  
Updating FRU Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After the configuration is determined, the utility updates the FRU nonvolatile storage area. First it  
verifies the Common Header area and checksum from the specified FRU file. The Internal Use  
Area is read out of the specified .FRU file and is programmed into the nonvolatile storage. The  
Chassis Area is read out of the specified .FRU file. Last it reads the Product Area out of the  
specified FRU file, then the area is programmed into the FRU nonvolatile storage. All areas are  
also written to the FRU.TMP file.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Updating DMI Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After programming the BMC FRU area, the utility then programs the following Chassis, Board,  
and Product FRU information to the DMI fields.  
Example:  
Loading DMI System Area  
Manufacturer Name : Intel  
Name : AC450NX Server System  
Version Number : ASDK128M1P2MBPP  
Serial Number : 0123456789  
Loading DMI Board Area  
Manufacturing Name : Intel  
Name : AC450NX Server System  
Serial Number : 0123456789  
Version Number : 661880-303  
Loading DMI Chassis Area  
Chassis Part Number : 693792-003  
Chassis Serial Number : Z00418630  
Asset Tag :  
If a failure occurs, the utility displays an error message and exits.  
Updating the SDR Nonvolatile Storage Area  
After the utility validates the header area of the supplied SDR file, it updates the SDR repository  
area. Before programming, the utility clears the SDR repository area. The utility filters all tagged  
SDRs depending on the product configuration set in the configuration file. Nontagged SDRs are  
automatically programmed. The utility also copies all written SDRs to the SDR.TMP file; it  
contains an image of what was loaded. The TMP file is also useful for debugging the server.  
Cleaning Up and Exiting  
If an update was successfully performed, the utility displays a single message and then exits.  
If the utility fails, it immediately exits with an error message and exit code.  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping  
This chapter tells how to hot-swap a fan.  
When the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which fan is  
defective by checking the yellow fan failure LEDs mounted next to each fan. When a fan fails, the  
LED will be on continuously. However, you do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a  
failed fan.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#2 bit)  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Hot-Swapping a Fan  
The server contains six fans in a (5 + 1) redundant configuration for cooling system components. If  
a single fan fails, the yellow fan failure LED on the front panel turns on. A fan-fail LED mounted  
next to each fan identifies the failed fan. You can easily hot-swap the defective fan without  
turning the server power off.  
CAUTION  
Even though the server can continue operating with only five fans, the  
defective fan must be replaced in a reasonable amount of time.  
Removing a Fan  
See Figure 9-1.  
1. Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array cover.  
2. Slide the fan array cover to the server front to free the cover from the locking tabs and lift the  
cover.  
NOTE  
✏
The fan array cover can be removed by first removing the top cover. See Chapter 12, “Server  
Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Look at the yellow fan failure LEDs to determine which fan is defective.  
WARNING  
The fan blade may still be rotating. To avoid injury wait until it stops  
rotating before grabbing the fan with your free hand.  
4. Use the grasp holes and remove the defective fan.  
5. Set it aside.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 9 Hot-swappable Fans: Hot Swapping  
A
B
OM07304  
Figure 9-1. Removing/Hot-swapping a Fan  
A. Grasp holes  
B. Fan  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Replacing a Fan  
See Figure 9-1.  
1. Remove the new fan from the protective packaging.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the fan in your equipment log.  
NOTE  
✏
Fans are keyed and can only be inserted one way. Be sure that the fan connector will mate with the  
front panel baseboard connector when aligning the fan in the fan cavity.  
3. Align the fan with the fan cavity.  
4. Lower the fan into the cavity.  
5. Replace the fan array cover and secure it with the screw removed earlier.  
White text  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives:  
Installing/Hot Swapping  
Hot-docking Bays  
Two 3.5-inch hot-docking bays provide space for 3.5-inch wide by 1-inch high single connector  
attachment (SCA) SCSI hard disk drives. You can install up to 2 industry-standard wide/fast-20  
SCSI III SCA-type hard disk drives in these bays.  
The power supply fans provide cooling for the hot swap drives. A system with two power supplies  
is capable of cooling most drives that would be installed into the system, however drives which  
dissipate a large amount of power may require three power supplies to be installed into the system  
to insure proper cooling. Refer to the product specifications to determine if the particular drive to  
be installed needs the additional cooling provided by a third power supply.  
Carriers for 3.5-inch wide 1-inch or 1.6-inch height drives allow easy hot-swapping of drives in  
and out of these bays without shutting down the server.  
By installing a Redundant Array of Inexpensive Disks (RAID) controller board on the PHP I/O  
baseboard, RAID software, and SCSI hard disk drives in the hot-docking bays, you can easily set  
up RAID applications.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#2 bit)  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drives  
The server supports a variety of single-ended and differential SCSI SCA-type hard disk drives. As  
shipped from the supplier, the server may not contain any drives. Contact your sales representative  
or dealer for a list of approved drives that can be installed in the server.  
Mounting a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Carrier  
See Figures 10-1 and 10-2.  
1. Remove the 3.5-inch hard disk drive from the protective wrapper, and place it on an antistatic  
surface.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.  
3. Orient the drive carrier so that the handle is toward your left and the metal EMI/ESD fingers  
are toward your right.  
4. Orient the drive so that the board-side faces toward the finger-side of the carrier and the SCA  
connector faces away from you.  
5. Being careful not to damage the metal fingers of the carrier, place it on the drive.  
6. Place the drive and carrier assembly on an antistatic surface of a table or a workbench so that  
the drive handle and fingers overlap the edge of the table or the workbench.  
7. Using four screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach the carrier to the  
drive.  
CAUTION  
Some specific hard disk drive designs require electrical isolation of the drive  
from the chassis or other ground paths. These drives are usually clearly  
labeled with this requirement on the drive. Full-height, 1.6-inch drives with  
this requirement must have an electrical isolator such as durable mylar tape  
placed between the EMI/ESD grounding fingers and the top cover of the  
drive. Failure to isolate this type of drive from the ground path will result in  
unpredictable operation of the drive, including severely impacted  
performance and data corruption.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping  
A
B
D
A
C
OM07153  
Figure 10-1. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier  
A. EMI/ESD grounding clips and fingers  
B. SCA connector  
C. SCSI hard disk drive  
D. Drive carrier handle  
OM08268  
Figure 10-2. Hard Disk Drive and Carrier Assembly  
A. Four screws  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Installing a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive in a Hot-docking Bay  
See Figure 10-3.  
1. Orient the carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-docking bay guide rails so that metal  
fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make sure that the  
carrier is placed correctly into the guide rails to avoid damage.  
2. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the  
drive docks with the peripheral bay backplane connector.  
CAUTION  
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push  
the assembly into the bay. Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of  
the bracket.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping  
A
OM07336  
Figure 10-3. Installing a Hard Disk Drive  
A. Drive carrier latch  
B. Drive carrier handle  
C. Hot-docking bay guide rails  
3. If you installed a RAID controller board in your server, run the Disk Array Controller Configuration  
utility supplied with the board. See the manufacturer’s documentation provided with the board.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Hot-swapping a SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive  
Status LEDs are arranged in sets of three below each of the 2 hot-docking bays. They monitor the  
status of each drive. When a yellow LED is on continuously, it is okay to hot-swap (remove and  
replace) a bad drive with a good one. You do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a drive.  
SCSI Drive Status LED Descriptions  
SCSI drive,  
power on  
SCSI drive  
active  
SCSI drive  
faulty*  
green LED  
green LED  
yellow LED  
Description and action if needed  
Drive is present with power.  
On  
On  
Off  
On  
Off  
Off  
Drive is present with power and is being accessed.  
Blinking  
Off  
Off  
Drive CAN be replaced. Steady yellow fault light  
indicates drive has a problem. Power to drive is off.  
On  
Drive SHOULD NOT be replaced at this time. A  
slowly blinking yellow fault light indicates that a drive  
that has just been replaced is in recovery mode  
(drive array being rebuilt). Power to drive is on.  
Off  
Slow blinking  
There is no drive installed in the bay.  
Off  
Off  
Off  
*
The hot-swap controller is responsible for turning the yellow drive fault LED on or off according to the states specified  
by commands received via SAF-TE and IMB.  
See Figures 10-3 and 10-4.  
1. Look at the yellow LEDs below the hot-docking bays to determine which drive is bad.  
2. Push on the drive carrier latch of the bad drive, and while grasping the handle, pull the  
assembly toward you to disengage the drive from the backplane connector.  
3. Carefully slide the assembly out of the bay, and place it on an antistatic surface.  
4. Orient the new carrier and drive assembly in front of the hot-docking bay guide rails so that  
metal fingers of the perforated metal bracket attached to the carrier are facing up. Make sure  
you correctly place the carrier into the guide rails to avoid damage.  
5. While grasping only the drive carrier handle, firmly push the assembly into the bay until the  
driver carrier latches.  
CAUTION  
Do not press on the perforated metal bracket of the carrier when you push  
the assembly into the bay. Otherwise you may damage the metal fingers of  
the bracket.  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 10 Hot-swappable SCSI Hard Disk Drives: Installing/Hotswapping  
A B C  
OM07345  
Figure 10-4. Hot-swap SCSI Drive Indicators  
A. Green LED, drive power  
B. Green LED, drive activity  
C. Yellow LED, drive fault  
W page should be blank  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot  
Swapping  
This chapter tells how to hot-swap a server power supply.  
When the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on, you can determine which  
power supply is defective by checking the three status LEDs on the back of each power supply. If  
a power supply fails, the yellow FAIL LED on the back of the power supply will be on  
continuously. You may hot-swap the power supply—remove and replace it—with a good one. If  
the server contains three power supplies, you do not need to shut the server down to hot-swap a  
failed power supply.  
The LEDs on the power supply are:  
•
•
•
Green PWR (Power) LED—when blinking, AC is applied to the power supply and standby  
voltages are available. When on continuously, all power outputs are ready.  
Yellow FAIL(Power Supply Failure) LED—when on continuously, the power supply has  
failed and it may be replaced.  
Yellow PRFL (Predictive Failure) LED—when blinking, the power supply is about to fail in  
the near future due to the fan performing poorly. The LED latches into a blinking state once  
the predictive failure condition occurs.  
Power Supply LEDs  
PWR (power)  
(Green)  
Off  
FAIL (power supply failure)  
PRFL (predictive failure)  
Power Supply Status  
(Yellow)  
(Yellow)  
No AC power  
Off  
Off  
AC in/standby outputs on Blinking  
Off  
Off  
DC outputs on and okay  
Power supply failure  
Current limit  
On  
Off  
On  
On  
Off  
Off  
On  
Off  
Blinking/None Latch  
Off  
Off  
Predictive failure  
Blinking/Latched  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Hot Swapping a Power Supply  
In a fully configured server, the power system contains three 750 watt auto-ranging power  
supplies; one of the power supplies is redundant. If a single power supply fails in the redundant  
power system, the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel turns on. You can easily  
hot-swap the defective power supply without turning the server power off.  
Power supplies are hot-swappable only in configurations with three power supplies.  
WARNING  
Because of chassis airflow disruption, the power supply bay should not  
be vacant for more than two minutes when server power is on.  
Exceeding the two-minute limit may cause damage to certain peripheral  
components.  
Before replacing a power supply in a two-power supply configuration,  
you must turn off power to the server.  
A filler panel is required in a two-power supply configuration. The  
filler panel must be installed within two minutes when moving from a  
three-power supply configuration to a two-power supply configuration.  
NOTE  
✏
If the system contains less that two power supplies or AC is not present in at  
least two power supplies and midplane jumper JP1 is removed, the system  
will automatically shutdown.  
In a three-power supply configuration a power supply can be swapped at any  
time.  
Removing a Power Supply  
CAUTION  
If the chassis contains only two power supplies, turn off all peripheral  
devices connected to the server. Then turn off the server power with the  
push-button on/off switch on the front panel.  
See Figures 11-1.  
1. Look at the yellow FAIL LEDs on the power supplies to determine which one is defective.  
2. Pull the power supply handle down to unlock it from the chassis.  
3. Pull the power supply toward you to unplug it.  
4. Remove the defective power supply, and set it aside.  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 11 Hot-swappable Power Supplies: Hot Swapping  
B
A
OM07324  
Figure 11-1. Removing a Power Supply  
A. Pull down handle  
B. Remove power supply  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Replacing a Power Supply  
See Figure 11-1.  
1. Remove the new power supply from the protective packaging.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the power supply in your equipment log.  
3. Slide the replacement power supply into the power supply cavity with the handle out.  
4. After the power supply contacts the midplane, lift the power supply handle to lock it into  
place.  
White text  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Part II: Service Technician’s Guide  
Safety Guidelines  
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing  
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description  
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing  
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages  
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
A Regulatory Specifications  
B Equipment Log  
C Warnings  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Guidelines  
BEFORE YOU REMOVE SERVER COVERS, OBSERVE THESE GUIDELINES:  
1. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server.  
2. Turn off DC power in the server by pressing the push-button on/off power switch on the front  
panel of the server.  
3. Disconnect AC power to the server by unplugging the alternating current (AC) power cord  
from the AC inlet filter or wall outlet.  
4. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I/O panel on the back of the server.  
5. Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap  
attached to chassis ground of the server—any unpainted metal surface—when handling  
components.  
Warnings and Cautions  
These warnings and cautions apply whenever you remove the top and side covers of the server to  
access components inside it. Integration of the server should be done only by technically qualified  
personnel.  
Server Precautions  
WARNING  
Server power on/off: The push-button on/off power switch on the front  
panel of the server does not turn off the AC power. To remove AC  
power from the server, you must unplug the AC power cord from the  
AC inlet filter.  
Hazardous conditions, power supply and power distribution backplane:  
Hazardous voltage, current, and energy levels are present inside the  
power supply and the power distribution backplane. There are no user-  
serviceable parts inside them; servicing should be done only by  
technically qualified personnel.  
Hazardous conditions, devices and cables: Hazardous electrical  
conditions may be present on power, telephone, and communication  
cables. Turn off the server and disconnect telecommunications systems,  
networks, modems, and each power cord attached to the server before  
opening it. Otherwise, personal injury or equipment damage can result.  
Avoid injury: The minimum server configuration weighs 51.4 kg  
(113 lbs), and the maximum one weighs 60 kg (132 lbs). To avoid injury,  
we recommend that a lift be used to insert the server into the slide  
assemblies in the equipment rack.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CAUTION  
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) and ESD protection: ESD can damage  
disk drives, add-in boards, and other components. This server can withstand  
normal levels of environmental ESD while you are hot-swapping hard disk  
drives and power supplies. However, we recommend doing all procedures  
in this manual only at an ESD workstation. If one is not available, you can  
provide some ESD protection by wearing an antistatic wrist strap attached to  
chassis ground of the server—any unpainted metal surface—when handling  
components.  
Handling boards and modules: Boards and modules can be extremely  
sensitive to ESD and always require careful handling. After removing a  
board or module from a protective wrapper or from the server, place the  
board or module component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
If you place the I/O baseboard on a conductive surface, the back-up battery  
leads may short out. If they do, this will result in a loss of CMOS data and  
will drain the battery. Do not slide a board or module over any surface.  
Cooling and airflow: Operating the server with the top and side covers  
removed can damage the components inside it. For proper cooling and  
airflow, always replace the covers and air baffles before turning on the  
server.  
Back-up battery: Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced.  
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the  
equipment manufacturer. Discard the used battery according to the  
manufacturer's instructions.  
Equipment Rack Precautions  
WARNING  
Anchor the equipment rack: The equipment rack must be anchored to  
an unmovable support to prevent it from falling over when one or more  
servers are extended in front of it on slide assemblies. The anchors must  
be able to withstand a force of up to 113 kg (250 lbs). You must also  
consider the weight of any other device installed in the rack.  
Main AC power disconnect: You are responsible for installing an AC  
power disconnect for the entire rack unit. This main disconnect must be  
readily accessible, and it must be labeled as controlling power to the  
entire unit, not just to the server(s).  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Safety Guidelines  
Grounding the rack installation: To avoid the potential for an electrical  
shock hazard, you must include a third wire safety grounding conductor  
with the rack installation. If the server power cord is plugged into an  
AC outlet that is part of the rack, then you must provide proper  
grounding for the rack itself. If the server power cord is plugged into a  
wall AC outlet, the safety grounding conductor in the power cord  
provides proper grounding only for the server. You must provide  
additional, proper grounding for the rack and other devices installed  
in it.  
Overcurrent protection: The server is designed for an AC line voltage  
source with up to 20 amperes of overcurrent protection. If the power  
system for the equipment rack is installed on a branch circuit with more  
than 20 amperes of protection, you must provide supplemental  
protection for the server. If more than one server is installed in the  
rack, the power source for each server must be from a separate branch  
circuit. The overall current rating of a server configured with three  
power supplies is under 12 amperes.  
CAUTION  
Temperature: The operating temperature of the server, when installed in an  
equipment rack, must not go below 5 °C (41 °F) or rise above 35 °C (95 °F).  
Extreme fluctuations in temperature can cause a variety of problems in your  
server.  
Ventilation: The equipment rack must provide sufficient airflow to the  
front of the server to maintain proper cooling. It must also include  
ventilation sufficient to exhaust a maximum of 3,150 Btu's per hour for the  
server. The rack selected and the ventilation provided must be suitable to  
the environment in which the server will be used.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall the server covers.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)  
Small flat-bladed screwdriver  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
Covers  
See Figures 12-1 and Figure 12-2 The server comes with several removable covers:  
•
•
The plastic snap-on front bezel provides user friendly system controls and indicators.  
The plastic snap-on peripheral bay cover provides access to the peripheral bay. You must  
remove the front bezel before you can remove this cover.  
•
The top cover provides access to the CPU baseboard, I/O baseboard, and PCI bus regular slot  
cover. You must remove the top cover before you can remove the PCI bus regular slot cover.  
The PCI bus hot-plug cover provides assess to the PCI bus hot-plug slots.  
The fan array cover provides access to the 6-fan array. It can be opened without removing the  
top cover.  
•
•
•
The memory module cover provides access to the two memory modules.  
CAUTION  
For proper cooling and airflow, do not operate the server with the covers  
removed. Always reinstall them before turning on the server.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
D
C
B
A
OM07302  
Figure 12-1. Server Covers  
A. Memory module cover  
B. Fan array cover  
C. Top cover  
D. PCI hot-plug cover  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Cover  
The peripheral bay cover is attached to the chassis with press-in rivets and spring clips. See  
Figure 12-2.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Grasp the peripheral bay cover handle and pull.  
3. Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched.  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Cover  
See Figure 12-2.  
1. Position the peripheral bay cover in position and press into place.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
B
A
OM07356  
Figure 12-2. Peripheral Bay Cover and Front Bezel  
A. Plastic snap-on Peripheral Bay Cover  
B. Plastic snap-on Front Bezel  
Removing the Front Bezel  
The plastic front bezel is attached to the chassis with press-in rivets and spring clips in the same  
manner as the peripheral bay cover.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the peripheral bay cover as described earlier.  
3. Grasp the bezel hand and pull.  
4. Place the bezel on a smooth surface so that it does not get scratched.  
Reinstalling the Front Bezel  
1. Install the peripheral bay cover as described earlier.  
2. Position the front bezel in position and press into place.  
Removing the Top Cover  
See Figures 12-3 and 12-4.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the server.  
3. Turn the server off with the push-button on/off power switch on the front panel.  
4. Unplug the AC power cord from the power inlet receptacle, or from the power source outlet.  
5. Label and disconnect all peripheral cables attached to the I/O panel on the back of the server.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
6. Remove and save the screws that attach the top cover to the chassis.  
NOTE  
✏
It is not necessary to remove the PCI bus hot-plug cover.  
7. While facing the back of the server, pull hard on the front edge of the cover to disengage the  
tabs along the sides of the cover from the slots in the chassis slide.  
8. Slide the cover backward about an inch, and lift it straight up. Set the cover aside.  
9. Lift PCI bus regular expansion slot cover from chassis.  
A
OM07303  
Figure 12-3. Top Cover  
C. Two screws  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
OM07305  
Figure 12-4. PCI Regular Slot Cover  
A. Two screws  
Reinstalling the Top Cover  
See Figures 12-3 and 12-4.  
1. Reinstall the PCI bus regular expansion slot cover.  
2. While facing the back of the server, position the top cover over the chassis so that the tabs  
along the edges of the cover align with the slots in the top edge of the chassis.  
3. Gently lower the cover straight down on top of the server. Then place your hands on the outer  
surface of the cover, opposite each other, and push the cover forward to seat it.  
4. Attach the cover to the chassis with the two screws, and tighten them firmly (6.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Connect all external cables and power cords to the server.  
Removing the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
See Figure 12-5.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove and save the screws that attach the PCI bus hot-plug cover to the chassis.  
3. While facing the back of the server, pull on the front edge of the cover to disengage the tabs  
along the front of the cover from the top cover.  
4. Remove the cover and set it aside.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
A
OM07357  
Figure 12-5. PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
Reinstalling the PCI Bus Hot-Plug Cover  
See Figure 12-5.  
1. Ensure that add-in boards are firmly seated in their respective slots.  
2. Position the cover over the top cover so that the tabs along its edges align with the slots in the  
top cover.  
3. Lower the cover until it rests on the top cover.  
4. Push the cover toward the server front to seat the tabs along the cover front with the top cover.  
5. Attach the cover to the top cover with the two screws, and tighten them firmly  
(6.0 inch-pounds).  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 12 Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling  
Removing the Fan Array Assembly Cover  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the front bezel as described earlier.  
3. Remove the top cover as described earlier.  
4. Remove and save the screw that secures the fan array assembly cover to the chassis.  
5. Slide the cover forward to free it from the securing tab.  
6. Remove the cover.  
Reinstalling the Fan Array Assembly Cover  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Place cover in position over the fan array. Ensure that the tabs interlock with the fan array  
assembly.  
3. Lower cover and slide it to the rear so that it engages locking tabs.  
4. Secure the cover screw removed earlier.  
5. Reinstall the top cover as described earlier.  
6. Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier.  
Removing the Memory Module Cover  
See Figure 12-6.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the front bezel as described earlier.  
3. Loosen the four captive screws securing the memory module cover and remove the cover.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
OM07353  
Figure 12-6. Memory Module Cover  
Reinstalling the Memory Module Cover  
See Figure 12-6.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Place the cover in position and tighten the four captive screws to secure the cover.  
3. Reinstall the front bezel as described earlier.  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall major server components. Because the CPU  
baseboard is mounted horizontally toward the front of the chassis and the PHP I/O baseboard is  
mounted horizontally towards the rear of the chassis, the procedures start with the covers and end  
up with the baseboards.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of  
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)  
Small flat-bladed screwdriver  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Fan Array Housing  
Removing the Fan Array Housing  
See Figures 13-1 and 13-2.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover, the fan array assembly cover, and the memory module cover as  
described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Use the grasp holes and remove all fan assemblies.  
4. Remove and save the five screws that secure the housing to the chassis.  
5. Remove the fan array housing.  
Reinstalling the Fan Array Housing  
See Figures 13-1 and 13-2.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Reinstall the fan array housing ensuring that it engages with the support tabs.  
3. Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws firmly (8.0-inch pounds).  
4. Reinstall each fan assembly. The fan assemblies are keyed and can only be installed if  
correctly oriented.  
5. Reinstall the top cover, the fan array assembly cover, and the memory module cover as  
described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling."  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
A
B
OM07304  
Figure 13-1. Fan Removal  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
B
A
A
A
OM07308  
Figure 13-2. Fan Array Housing  
A. Screws (five)  
B. Fan array housing  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
LCD Module  
The LCD module displays server information.  
Removing the LCD Module  
See Figure 13-3.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the two screws that secure the LCD module to the chassis.  
4. Disconnect the LCD module data and power cables from the front panel board and set the LCD  
module aside.  
Reinstalling the LCD Module  
See Figure 13-3.  
1. Connect the LCD module data and power cables to the front panel board.  
NOTE  
✏
Verify that both cables are below the sheet of insulating material above the  
front panel board.  
2. Insert the screws that you removed earlier and tighten the screws.  
3. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
OM07358  
Figure 13-3. LCD Module  
Memory Modules  
CAUTION  
To avoid damaging the memory module DIMM sockets, do not attempt to  
use the metal stiffener on the memory module as a handle.  
Removing a Memory Module  
See Figure 13-4.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the memory module outward about 90° to  
disengage the pin-and-socket connector of the module from the pin-and-socket connector of  
the midplane.  
4. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, slide it out of the slot  
guides. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in  
an antistatic protective wrapper.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Reinstalling a Memory Module  
See Figure 13-4.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, remove it from its  
protective wrapper. Place the module DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
3. Record the serial number of the memory module in your equipment log.  
4. Remove any installed DIMM from the removed memory module and reinstall them in the  
replacement memory module.  
NOTE  
✏
The memory module installs DIMM-side down.  
5. Grasp the memory module by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides  
until the levers engage with the flanges in front of the guides.  
6. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat  
the pin-and-socket connector of the module into the pin-and-socket connector of the midplane.  
7. If you removed the LCD module, reinstall it as described earlier.  
8. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
OM07361  
Figure 13-4. Memory Module  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Front Side Bus Terminator Module  
The CPU baseboard provides four slot 2 connectors for processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges.  
If any slot 2 connector is depopulated, a terminator module must be installed in the connector to  
properly terminate the signals on the front side bus (FSB). For example, if only two slots are  
populated with processors, you need FSB terminator modules in the two unpopulated processor  
slots. The terminator modules are housed in plastic covers.  
Removing a Terminator Module  
See Figure 13-5.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the terminator module outward to eject the  
module out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.  
5. Slide the module out of the slot guides, and place it component-side down on a nonconductive,  
static-free surface.  
Reinstalling a Terminator Module  
See Figure 13-5.  
1. Grasp the terminator module by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides  
until the levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides.  
2. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the module to seat  
the module into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.  
3. Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide.  
4. Tighten the captive screw.  
5. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
OM07306  
Figure 13-5. Removing a Holddown  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Processor  
The CPU baseboard supports up to four processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges.  
CAUTION  
The processors can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful  
handling. After removing a processor from a protective wrapper or from the  
CPU baseboard, place it on a nonconductive, static-free surface. Do not  
slide the processor over any surface.  
Removing a Processor  
See Figures 13-5.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Loosen the holddown bracket captive screw and remove the holddown bracket.  
4. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers of the processor cartridge outward to eject the  
cartridge out of the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.  
5. Slide the cartridge out of the slot guides, and place it heat sink-side up on a nonconductive,  
static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective wrapper.  
CAUTION  
If a slot 2 connector is depopulated, a terminator module must be installed in  
the connector to properly terminate the signals on the FSB.  
Installing a Processor  
See Figures 13-5.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the processor cartridge or terminator module as described earlier.  
4. Being careful not to touch the gold edge connector on the processor cartridge, remove it from  
the protective wrapper. Place the cartridge heat sink-side up on a nonconductive, static-free  
surface.  
5. Record the serial number of the cartridge in your equipment log.  
6. Grasp the cartridge by the eject/insert levers, and carefully slide it into the slot guides until the  
levers engage with the flanges in the front sides of the guides.  
7. Simultaneously rotate the levers inward until they are flush with the edge of the cartridge to  
seat the cartridge into the slot 2 connector on the CPU baseboard.  
8. Insert the hook end of the holddown bar in the flange of the right slot guide.  
9. Tighten the captive screw.  
10. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
DC to DC Converter VRM  
VRM in connector  
Provides power for  
Description  
J1  
J2  
J3  
J4  
J5  
J6  
Processor #1  
Processor core power only  
L2 Cache power only  
Processor core power only  
Processor core power only  
L2 Cache power only  
Processor core power only  
Processor #1 and #2  
Processor #2  
Processor #3  
Processor #3 and #4  
Processor #4  
Removing a DC to DC Converter VRM  
See Figure 13-6.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Using a small flat-bladed screwdriver, push the plastic ejector levers on each end of the  
connector away from the VRM to eject it out of the connector.  
4. Place the VRM on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Installing a DC to DC Converter VRM  
See Figure 13-6.  
1. Remove the DC to DC converter VRM from the antistatic package.  
2. Carefully insert the VRM in the connector on the CPU baseboard. Make sure you do not bend  
the connector pins.  
3. Push down firmly on each end of the VRM until the ejector levers of the connector snap into  
place, locking the VRM in the connector.  
4. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
F
E
D
A
G
B
C
J
I
H
OM07318  
Figure 13-6. DC to DC Converter VRM  
A. VRM socket  
B. DC to DC Converter VRM  
C. Ejector lever  
D. J1, VRM connector  
E. J3, VRM connector  
F. J2, VRM connector  
G. J5, VRM connector  
H. J6, VRM connector  
I. J4, VRM connector  
J. CPU Baseboard  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CPU Tray  
The CPU tray provides rigid mounting for the front panel board, the CPU baseboard, and the  
memory modules. It also facilitates mating with the midplane.  
Removing the CPU Tray  
See Figure 13-7.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove all terminator and processor modules as described earlier.  
4. Remove the LCD module as described earlier.  
5. Remove the memory modules as described earlier.  
6. Remove the fan array housing as described earlier.  
7. Remove six screws that secure the tray to the chassis.  
8. Simultaneously pull the eject/insert levers down to eject the tray out of the midplane.  
9. Slide the tray from the chassis.  
Reinstalling the CPU Tray  
See Figure 13-7 and 13-8.  
1. Carefully position the tray on the guide rails and slide the tray into the chassis.  
CAUTION  
Be careful not to pinch the cables coming from the peripheral bay when  
reinstalling the tray.  
2. Simultaneously lift the eject/insert levers to mate the tray grand connector with the midplane  
grand connector. Ensure that the lower tray guide engages with the tray support attached to the  
peripheral bay. Be sure CPU support rail engages rear support.  
3. Reinstall the six screws that secure the tray to the chassis.  
4. Reinstall all terminator and processor modules as described earlier.  
5. Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.  
6. Reinstall the memory modules as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier  
8. Reinstall the top cover and memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
E
D
C
A
C
B
B
F
OM07327  
Figure 13-7. CPU Tray  
A. Rear support  
B. Eject/Insert levers  
C. Screws (six)  
D. Midplane  
E. Grand connector  
F. Front panel board  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
A
B
OM07328  
Figure 13-8. CPU Tray Support Rail  
Front Panel Board  
The front panel board contains the server controls and indicators. It is mounted on snap-on and  
threaded standoffs on the CPU Tray (see Figure 13-7).  
Removing the Front Panel Board  
See Figure 13-9.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.  
3. Remove the insulating material from the front panel board.  
4. Remove the nine screws, and remove the board.  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
CAUTION  
When the front panel board is free of the CPU board connector, its switches  
are surrounded by sheet metal. Be careful not to damage these switches  
when lifting the front panel board.  
5. Push/pull the front panel board horizontally to free it from the CPU baseboard connector and  
lift the board from the chassis.  
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the Front Panel Board  
See Figure 13-9.  
CAUTION  
When positioning the front panel board for reinstallation be sure its switches  
are in the sheet metal holes before mating its connector with the CPU  
baseboard. If the switches are not in the holes they may be damaged.  
1. Position the front panel board over threaded standoffs on the chassis.  
2. Push the board horizontally to mate the connector with the CPU baseboard connector.  
3. Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs.  
4. Make sure the board is properly positioned, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.  
6. Reinstall the LCD module as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the insulating material removed earlier from the front panel board.  
8. Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.  
9. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.  
A
B
C
OM07322  
Figure 13-9. Front Panel Board  
A. CPU baseboard connector  
B. LCD data connector  
C. LCD power connector  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CPU Baseboard  
Removing the CPU Baseboard  
See Figure 13-10.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.  
3. Remove the front panel board as described earlier.  
4. Remove the terminator modules as described earlier.  
5. Remove the processors as described earlier.  
6. Remove the screws in the base of the processor retention module.  
7. Remove the module—it comes out as one unit—and set it aside.  
8. Remove the DC to DC converters as described earlier.  
9. Lift the baseboard to unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.  
10. Place the baseboard on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic  
protective wrapper.  
Reinstalling the CPU Baseboard  
See Figure 13-10.  
1. Remove CPU baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Position the baseboard over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the CPU tray.  
3. Press the baseboard onto the snap-on standoffs, and insert the screws loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
4. Position the processor retention module over the CPU baseboard and loosely insert the  
retaining screws into the threaded standoffs.  
5. Make sure the baseboard is properly seated, and then tighten all screws to 8.0 inch-pounds.  
6. Reinstall the processors and any terminator modules as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall DC to DC converters as described earlier.  
8. Reinstall the front panel board as described earlier.  
9. Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
= A  
= B  
OM07321  
Figure 13-10. CPU Baseboard  
A. Standoff (six)  
B. Screw (twelve)  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Add-in Boards  
The PHP I/O baseboard provides 10 PCI bus master slots and one ISA bus master slot. They  
accept any add-in PCI and ISA boards or any add-in board that is compatible with an IBM PC AT†  
or PC XT† system (except for an 8-bit drop card that fits only in an 8-bit PC XT connector). One  
PCI slot shares a common chassis I/O expansion slot with the ISA slot; you can use the slot for  
either PCI or the ISA, but not both.  
CAUTION  
Some accessory/option card outputs may exceed Class 2 or limited power  
source limits and must use appropriate interconnecting cabling in  
accordance with the National Electric Code during installation.  
Do not overload the PHP I/O baseboard by installing add-in boards that draw  
excessive current. For expansion slot current limitations, see Chapter 20,  
“Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage.”  
Add-in boards can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always require careful  
handling. After removing the board from the protective wrapper or from the  
baseboard, place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free  
surface. Do not slide the board over any surface.  
NOTE  
✏
If you are installing or removing an ISA add-in board , you must run the  
SSU to reconfigure the server. Running the SSU is optional for a PCI add-in  
board.  
Installing an Add-in Board  
See Figures 13-11, 13-12, and 13-13.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
NOTE  
✏
The 64-bit PCI hot swap expansion slots also have a power enabling switch  
actuator. This actuator must be installed (unless override is set in the BIOS  
setup or an expansion board is installed). The actuator is held in place by the  
expansion slot cover screw.  
3. Select the appropriate 16-bit ISA, 32-bit PCI, or 64-bit PCI expansion slot. Remove and save  
the expansion slot cover and, if installed, the power enabling switch actuator.  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
A
B
C
OM07319  
Figure 13-11. PHP I/O Baseboard Expansion Slots  
A. 16-bit ISA slot  
B. 32-bit PCI slots  
C. 64-bit hot swap PCI slots  
OM07337  
Figure 13-12. Expansion Slot Cover  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
5. Being careful not to touch the components or gold edge connectors on the add-in board,  
remove it from the protective wrapper, and place it component-side up on a nonconductive,  
antistatic surface.  
6. Record the serial number of the board in your equipment log.  
7. Set any jumpers or switches according to the board manufacturer’s instructions.  
8. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and firmly press it into an expansion slot on  
the PHP I/O baseboard (Figures 13-13). The tapered foot of the board retaining bracket must  
fit into the mating slot in the expansion slot frame.  
9. Secure the add-in board to the expansion slot frame using the expansion slot cover retaining  
screw.  
10. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.  
11. If you installed an ISA add-in board, run the SSU to reconfigure the server. Running the SSU  
is optional for a PCI add-in board. For information about running this utility, see Chapter 5,  
“System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
A
B
C
OM07331  
Figure 13-13. Installing an Add-in Board  
A. 16-bit ISA slot (ISA board component-side up)  
B. 32-bit PCI slot (PCI board, component-side down)  
C. 64-bit hot swap PCI slot (PCI board, component-side down)  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Removing an Add-in Board  
CAUTION  
Expansion slot covers must be installed on all vacant slots to maintain the  
electromagnetic emission characteristics of the server and to ensure proper  
cooling of the server components.  
See Figures 13-11, 13-12, and 13-13.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Disconnect any cables attached to the board you are removing.  
4. Remove and retain the screw securing the add-in board to the expansion slot frame.  
5. Grasp the board by the top edge or upper corners, and carefully pull it toward you until the  
edge connector of the board pulls free from the connector on the PHP I/O baseboard. Make  
sure that you do not scrape the board against other components.  
6. Store the board in an antistatic protective wrapper.  
7. Install an expansion slot cover (Figure 13-12) over the vacant slot. The tapered foot of the  
cover must fit into the mating slot in the bottom of the expansion slot frame.  
8. If this is a 64-bit hot swap slot, install the power enabling switch actuator over the vacant slot.  
The spring at the end of the actuator rests on the power enabling switch.  
9. Secure the expansion slot cover and the actuator to the expansion slot frame using the  
expansion slot cover retaining screw.  
10. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.  
11. If you removed an ISA add-in board, run the SSU to configure the system. For information  
about running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
I/O Riser Card  
Removing the I/O Riser Card  
See Figure 13-14.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Disconnect the Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) signal cable from J1 on the I/O  
riser card.  
4. Remove and save the screw.  
5. Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners, carefully pull it toward you until the edge  
connector of the card pulls free from its connector J2A1 on the PHP I/O baseboard. Make sure  
that you do not scrape the card against other components.  
6. Place the card on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the I/O Riser Card  
See Figure 13-14.  
1. Remove the I/O riser card from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Holding the card by the top edge or upper corners, carefully insert the edge connector of the  
card into connector J2A1 on the PHP I/O baseboard. Press the card firmly into the connector.  
3. Insert the screw you removed earlier in the threaded hole in the chassis. Tighten the screw  
firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
4. Connect the ICMB signal cable to J1 on the riser card.  
5. Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
B
A
C
OM07323  
Figure 13-14. I/O Riser Card  
A. J1B1, I/O connector  
B. Screw  
C. ICMB signal cable  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
I/O Tray  
The I/O Tray provides rigid mounting for the PHP I/O baseboard and facilitates mating with the  
midplane.  
Removing the I/O Tray  
See Figure 13-15.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the add-in boards installed in the  
expansion slots.  
4. Remove the add-in boards as described earlier. This step is not required unless replacing the  
PHP I/O baseboard.  
5. Label and disconnect all internal cables connected to the PHP I/O baseboard.  
6. Remove the three screws securing the tray to the chassis.  
10. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers to eject the tray out of the midplane.  
7. Lift the tray from the chassis.  
Reinstalling the I/O Tray  
See Figure 13-15.  
1. Position the tray over the chassis and lower it on to its supports.  
2. Simultaneously rotate the eject/insert levers into the locked position. This action also mates the  
PHP I/O baseboard connector with the midplane connector.  
3. Reinstall the three securing screws.  
4. Connect all internal cables to the PHP I/O baseboard.  
5. Reinstall all add-in boards, if removed, as described earlier.  
6. Connect all internal cables connected to the add-in boards installed in the expansion slots.  
7. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
C
A
B
B
A
OM07310  
Figure 13-15. I/O Tray  
A. Screws (three)  
B. Eject/insert levers  
C. I/O Tray  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) Board  
Removing the ICMB Board  
See Figure 13-16.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Disconnect the ICMB signal cable from connector J1 on the I/O riser card.  
4. Remove and save the screw that attach the ICMB board to the I/O Tray.  
5. Push on the tab of the snap-on standoff and pull the board toward you to remove it from the  
snap-on standoff.  
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the ICMB Board  
See Figure 13-16.  
1. Remove the ICMB board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Position the board over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the I/O Tray.  
3. Press the board onto the snap-on standoff, and insert the screw loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
4. Make sure the board is properly aligned, and tighten the screw firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
5. Connect the signal cable to connector J1 on the I/O riser card.  
6. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
OM07354  
Figure 13-16. ICMB Board  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
PHP I/O Baseboard  
CAUTION  
The PHP I/O baseboard can be extremely sensitive to ESD and always  
requires careful handling. After removing the baseboard from the server,  
place it component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface to prevent  
shorting out the battery leads. If you place the baseboard on a conductive  
surface, the back-up battery leads may short out. If they do, this will result  
in a loss of CMOS data and will drain the battery. Do not slide the  
baseboard over any surface.  
Removing the PHP I/O Baseboard  
See Figure 13-17.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.  
4. Remove the I/O riser card as described earlier.  
5. Remove the ICMB board as described earlier.  
6. Remove all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers.  
7. Remove the add-in boards as described earlier.  
8. Remove the plastic divider and base.  
9. Remove and save the screws that attach the PHP I/O baseboard to the tray.  
10. Pull the board toward you to unsnap it from the snap-on standoffs.  
11. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the PHP I/O Baseboard  
See Figure 13-17.  
1. Remove the PHP I/O baseboard from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Position the baseboard over the snap-on and threaded standoffs on the center bulkhead of the  
chassis.  
3. Press the baseboard onto the snap-on standoffs and install the plastic divider and base.  
4. Insert the screws loosely into the threaded standoffs.  
5. Make sure the baseboard is properly seated, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-pounds).  
6. Reinstall the I/O board as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the I/O riser card.  
8. Reinstall the ICMB board as described earlier.  
9. Connect all internal cables to the PHP I/O baseboard.  
10. Reinstall the add-in boards in their original expansion slots as described earlier.  
11. Connect all internal cables that go to the add-in boards installed in the expansion slots.  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
12. Reinstall all PCI hot plug expansion slot power switch activators and covers in their original  
positions.  
13. Reinstall the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12.  
14. Connect all peripheral device cables that go to the I/O panel on the rear of the system.  
15. Run the SSU, and use the saved configuration file to restore all options to the same settings.  
For information about running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to  
Run.”  
= A  
= B  
OM07317  
Figure 13-17. PHP I/O Baseboard  
A. Snap-on standoffs (two)  
B. Screws (thirteen)  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
MidPlane  
Removing the Midplane  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.  
4. Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.  
5. Remove three screws holding the upper midplane support bracket and remove the bracket.  
6. Remove four screws holding the midplane support bracket to the chassis and remove the  
bracket.  
7. Remove and save the screws that attach the midplane to its support bracket and remove the  
midplane.  
8. Place the midplane on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the Midplane  
1. Remove the midplane from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Position the midplane on its support bracket and insert the screws loosely into the threaded  
standoffs.  
3. Make sure the midplane is properly positioned, and tighten all screws firmly (8.0 inch-  
pounds).  
4. Reinstall the midplane and its support bracket in the chassis.  
5. Reinstall the upper midplane support bracket.  
6. Reinstall the I/O Tray as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier.  
8. Remove the top and PCI bus regular slot covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
AC Filter and Cable  
Removing the AC Filter and Cable  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.  
4. Remove the I/O Tray as described earlier.  
5. Remove and save the screws that attaches the AC filter tray to the chassis.  
6. Remove and save the screws that attaches the three AC plugs to the chassis.  
7. Remove the three plug retaining brackets.  
8. Remove the AC filter and cable.  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Reinstalling the AC Filter and Cable  
1. Remove the AC filter and cable from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Lay the cable in position inside the chassis.  
3. Reinstall the three plug retaining brackets and secure with screws.  
4. Reinstall the AC filter tray.  
5. Reinstall the I/O Tray as described earlier.  
6. Reinstall the CPU baseboard tray as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
Peripheral Bay  
Removing the Peripheral Bay  
See Figure 13-18  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove and save the four screws that secure the peripheral bay to the chassis.  
4. Grab the CPU baseboard tray support and pull the peripheral bay from the chassis.  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay  
See Figure 13-18  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Place the peripheral bay into position and push into place using the CPU baseboard tray  
support.  
3. Ensure that the CPU baseboard tray support engages with the CPU baseboard tray.  
4. Install the four securing screws removed earlier.  
5. Reinstall the top and memory module covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
OM07350  
Figure 13-18. Peripheral Bay  
Peripheral Bay Backplane  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Backplane  
See Figure 13-19.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove Peripheral Bay as described earlier.  
4. Tag and disconnect power and signal cable to the diskette drive and CD-ROM drive.  
5. Remove and save eight securing screws and remove backplane from peripheral bay.  
6. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Backplane  
See Figure 13-19.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
3. Position and align the board over the two alignment pins.  
4. Reinstall the eight securing screws removed earlier.  
5. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier.  
= A  
= B  
OM07355  
Figure 13-19. Peripheral Bay Backplane  
A. Snap-on standoffs (two)  
B. Screws (eight)  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board  
Removing the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the fan array housing as described earlier.  
4. Remove the CPU tray as described earlier.  
5. Remove the peripheral bay as described earlier.  
6. Tag and disconnect all cables to the board.  
7. Remove and save the screws that attached the board to the chassis and remove the board.  
8. Place the board on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Reinstalling the Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board  
1. Remove the board from the antistatic protective wrapper if you placed it in one.  
2. Attach the board to chassis.  
3. Connect all cables.  
4. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described earlier.  
5. Reinstall the CPU tray as described earlier.  
6. Reinstall the fan array housing as described earlier.  
7. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 13 Server Components: Removing/Reinstalling  
A
OM07342  
Figure 13-20. Peripheral Bay Blind Mate Board  
A. Screw (four)  
This page is blank  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14 Removable Media Drives:  
Installing/Removing/Replacing  
This chapter tells how to remove and reinstall removable media drives.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of  
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
•
Phillips (cross-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)  
Small flat-bladed screwdriver  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
Diskette Drive  
The 3.5-inch diskette drive in the 3.5-inch user-accessible drive bay supports 720 KB, 1.25 MB,  
1.44 MB, and 2.88 MB media. Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved  
add-in devices.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Removing the Diskette Drive  
See Figure 14-1.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Disconnect the power and signal cables from the 3.5-inch diskette drive.  
4. Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to the 3.5-inch drive bay to the peripheral  
bay.  
5. Pull the diskette drive and tray from the peripheral bay.  
6. Remove and save the screws that secure the drive to its support tray and place it  
component-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface, or store it in an antistatic protective  
wrapper.  
Replacing the Diskette Drive  
See Figure 14-1.  
1. Remove the 3.5-inch diskette drive from the protective packaging, and place it component-side  
up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.  
3. Set any jumpers or switches according to the drive manufacturer's instructions.  
4. Install diskette drive in its support tray using the screws removed earlier.  
5. Slide the drive into the 3.5-inch diskette drive bay until it stops.  
6. Connect the power and signal cables.  
7. Secure the drive to the bay with the screw you removed earlier.  
8. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling”.  
9. Run the SSU to specify that the diskette drive is installed in the server. For information about  
running this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing  
B
A
OM07360  
Figure 14-1. Diskette Drive  
A. Screw (one)  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CD-ROM Drive  
The server comes with an CD-ROM drive installed in the peripheral bay. Contact your sales  
representative or dealer for a list of approved add-in devices.  
Removing the CD-ROM Drive  
See Figures 14-2, and 14-3.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Disconnect the power and the signal cables from the CD-ROM drive.  
4. Squeeze the tabs on the plastic snap-in slide rails toward the drive to release it. Pull the drive  
out of the bay until you can access its power and signal cables.  
5. Remove and save the four screws and the two snap-in slide rails from the drive.  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 14 Removable Media Drives: Installing/Removing/Replacing  
D
B
A
E
C
OM07359  
Figure 14-2. CD-ROM Drive  
A. CD-ROM Drive  
B. Plastic snap-in slide rail  
C. Tab  
D. Power cable  
E. Signal cable  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
D
B
A
C
OM06742  
Figure 14-3. Snap-in Plastic Slide Rails  
A. CD-ROM drive  
B. Tab  
C. Screw  
D. Slide rail  
Replacing the CD-ROM Drive  
See Figures 14-2, and 14-3.  
1. Remove the CD-ROM drive from the protective packaging, and place it on an antistatic  
surface.  
2. Record the model and serial numbers of the drive in your equipment log.  
3. Set any jumpers and switches on the drive according to the manufacturer’s instructions.  
4. Using two screws of the appropriate size and length (not supplied), attach each plastic slide rail  
to the drive.  
5. Orient the drive so that the slide rails engage in the bay guide rails and push the drive into the  
bay until the slide rails lock in place.  
6. Connect the power signal cables to the drive.  
7. Reinstall the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling”  
8. This step is optional. Run the SSU or Setup to specify that the CD-ROM drive is the boot  
device. For information about running these utilities, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility:  
When to Run,” and Chapter 4, “Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
This chapter describes the midplane.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Midplane Features  
The midplane distributes the power load—CPU and PHP I/O baseboards, memory modules,  
peripheral bays, and hot-swap hard disk backplane—among two or three 750 watt autoranging  
power supplies. It also provides a bus interface for the CPU and PHP I/O baseboards, memory  
modules, and the hot-swap hard disk backplane. The midplane provides the following voltages  
and maximum currents:  
Voltage  
+12 V  
Maximum Current  
56 A  
68 A  
61 A  
1 A  
+5 V  
+3.3 V  
5 V standby  
-12 V  
1 A  
+24 V Bias  
100 mA  
I2C Bus  
The private I2C bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server. The 5 V standby  
voltage provides power for the bus, and it is available even when the server power is off.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Detection Signals  
Signal Name  
Description  
Present  
When the presence detect line is low, the power supply is present.  
AC OK  
When the power-good signal on the midplane goes high, it signifies that all power  
supply voltages are available and stable.  
Predictive Failure  
The predictive failure signal from the power supply alerts the front panel controller  
(FPC) in case the supply is likely to fail because of a poorly performing fan—running  
at a slower RPM than normal. When the signal goes high, the FPC warns the user  
about the upcoming failure but it does not shut down the power supply.  
Fault  
When the fault signal from the power supply goes low, it indicates that the power  
supply has failed. To clear the fault, you must remove and reapply AC power to the  
power supply.  
Power On  
When the power-on signal on the midplane goes high, the power supplies power up  
if there is no 240 VA shutdown condition.  
5 V Quick Discharge  
The quick discharge circuit speeds up discharging the 5 V bus after power is turned off. The  
circuit starts discharging the bus as the voltage drops to around 1 V.  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
Midplane Connectors  
A
B
C
D
OM07339  
Figure 15-1. Midplane  
A. Grand connector  
B. Memory module connector (J6)  
C. Peripheral power connector (J11)  
D. Memory module connector (J7)  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Grand Connector  
Pins on this connector extend through the midplane and connect with both the CPU baseboard and  
the PHP I/O baseboard.  
F16 and Front Panel Connector, J3  
Signals  
Pins  
1
A
B
C
D
E
COM2_TO_FP_EN GROUND  
GROUND  
SIN_TTL_COM2  
IO_TMS  
PWRGDB  
A20M_L  
COM2_TO_SIO_EN  
STPCLK_L  
IO_TRST_L  
PICD(0)  
PIC_CLK  
GROUND  
PICD(1)  
2
IO_TCK  
XIMB_SOUT_EN  
3
IO_TDO  
GROUND  
IO_TDI  
4
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
NMI_5V  
GROUND  
unused  
5
GROUND  
INIT_L  
6
CPU_SPI_RESET_L PROC_RESET_L  
GROUND  
BMC_SPI_BUS(2)  
GROUND  
X0IB_L  
GROUND  
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)  
GROUND  
CIB_INT(0)  
GROUND  
INTR  
7
GROUND  
GROUND  
8
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)  
GROUND  
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)  
SMI_L  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
GROUND  
IGNNE_L  
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA IO_PWRGD  
X0D_L(0)  
GROUND  
GROUND  
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL  
X0D_L(1)  
X0XRTS_L  
GROUND  
X0HRTS_L  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
FERR_L  
X0D_L(3)  
DSEL0_L  
X0D_L(4)  
X0D_L(2)  
X0BE_L(0)  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
X0BLK_L  
GROUND  
X0RST_L  
GROUND  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
DCD_TTL_FP  
GROUND  
WDEVT_L  
GROUND  
DCMPLTB_L  
ISP_EN_L  
GROUND  
-12V  
GROUND  
GROUND  
DCMPLTA_L  
GROUND  
X0D_L(6)  
X0D_L(5)  
X0PAR_L  
X0D_L(8)  
GROUND  
GROUND  
SIN_TTL_XIMB  
GROUND  
X0D_L(9)  
X0D_L(7)  
X0ADS_L  
GROUND  
GROUND  
X0D_L(11)  
X0BE_L(1)  
X0XSTBN_L  
GROUND  
SOUT_TTL_COM2  
GROUND  
X0D_L(12)  
X0D_L(14)  
X0D_L(15)  
GROUND  
X0D_L(10)  
GROUND  
X0XSTBP_L  
GROUND  
X0D_L(13)  
GROUND  
DOFF0_L  
X0HSTBP_L  
X0HSTBN_L  
ISP_MODE  
ISP_SCLK  
ISP_FPC_EN_L  
-12V  
X0CLK  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
DVALIDA_L  
DOFF1_L  
DSR_TTL_FP  
GROUND  
CTS_TTL_FP  
RI_TTL_FP  
ISP_SDO  
GROUND  
ISP_FPC_SDO  
GROUND  
RTS_TTL_FP  
GROUND  
GROUND  
CPU_SLP_L  
GROUND  
INTRUSION_L  
ISP_SDI  
DTR_TTL_FP  
SPEAKER_DATA  
GROUND  
DVALIDB_L  
GROUND  
FAN_FAILED_L  
GROUND  
VCC_STDBY  
I2C_FPC_SCL  
I2C_FPC_SDA  
GROUND  
FP_TO_PIIX4_PWRBTN SECURE_MODE_BMC  
VCC_STDBY  
GROUND  
HARD_RESET  
GROUND  
DSEL1_L  
X1IB_L  
GROUND  
PWR_GOOD  
GROUND  
DS2P_I2C_SDA  
DS2P_I2C_SCL  
PS_PWR_ON  
continued  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
F16 and Front Panel Connector, J3 (continued)  
Signals  
Pins  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
A
B
C
D
E
X1D_L(0)  
X1D_L(1)  
X1D_L(3)  
X1D_L(4)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(6)  
X1D_L(8)  
X1D_L(9)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(12)  
X1D_L(14)  
X1D_L(15)  
GROUND  
X1CLK  
GROUND  
X1XRTS_L  
GROUND  
X1D_L(2)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(5)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(7)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(10)  
GROUND  
X1D_L(13)  
GROUND  
5V_RET_SENSE  
GROUND  
FP_NMI_SWT_L  
GROUND  
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L  
GROUND  
X1HRTS_L  
GROUND  
X1BE_L(0)  
GROUND  
X1PAR_L  
GROUND  
X1ADS_L  
X1D_L(11)  
X1BE_L(1)  
X1XSTBN_L  
GROUND  
5V_SENSE  
GROUND  
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L  
GROUND  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC  
GROUND  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC X1BLK_L  
GROUND  
GROUND  
X1RST_L  
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
GROUND  
GROUND  
MIOC_INTREQ_L  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
GROUND  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
GROUND  
X1XSTBP_L  
GROUND  
X1HSTBP_L  
X1HSTBN_L  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Grand Connector to Mem A, J4 and Mem B, J1  
Signals  
Pins  
1
A
B
C
D
E
MD#(35)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(34)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(33)  
+1.5V  
2
MD#(32)  
GND  
MD#(31)  
GND  
3
MD#(30)  
GND  
DSTBN1#  
GND  
MD#(29)  
GND  
4
MD#(28)  
GND  
MD#(27)  
GND  
5
MD#(26)  
GND  
DSTBP1#  
GND  
MD#(25)  
+1.5V  
6
MD#(24)  
GND  
MD#(23)  
GND  
7
MD#(22)  
GND  
MD#(21)  
GND  
MD#(20)  
GND  
8
GND  
MD#(19)  
GND  
9
MUXCLK0  
GND  
GND  
MD#(17)  
GND  
MD#(18)  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
GND  
Was DSEL#  
GND  
MRESET#  
GND  
GND  
Was DOFF0_L  
GND  
Was DOFF1_L  
+1.5V  
MD#(16)  
GND  
MD#(15)  
GND  
MD#(14)  
GND  
MD#(13)  
GND  
MD#(12)  
GND  
MD#(11)  
GND  
MD#(10)  
GND  
MD#(9)  
GND  
DSTBP0#  
GND  
MD#(8)  
+1.5V  
MD#(7)  
GND  
MD#(6)  
GND  
MD#(5)  
GND  
DSTBN0#  
GND  
MD#(4)  
GND  
MD#(3)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(2)  
GND  
MD#(1)  
GND  
GND  
SPARECLK0  
GND  
MD#(0)  
GND  
GND  
TCK  
TDI  
GND  
TMS  
GND  
TRST#  
GND  
GND  
MA#(13)  
GND  
GND  
MA#(12)  
GND  
MA#(11)  
GND  
MA#(10)  
+1.5V  
MA#(9)  
GND  
MA#(8)  
GND  
MA#(7)  
GND  
MA#(6)  
GND  
MA#(5)  
GND  
MA#(4)  
GND  
GND  
MA#(3)  
GND  
MA#(2)  
GND  
GND  
RCGCLK  
GND  
MA#(1)  
GND  
GND  
MA#(0)  
GND  
CSTB#  
GND  
GND  
ROW#  
+1.5V  
CMND1#  
GND  
BANK0#  
GND  
BANK1#  
GND  
BANK2#  
GND  
CMND0#  
GND  
CARD#  
GND  
GND  
PHIT#  
GND  
RCMPLT#  
GND  
GND  
SPARECLK1  
GND  
RHIT#  
GND  
GND  
Unused  
GND  
Unused  
GND  
GND  
Unused  
GND  
MD#(71)  
GND  
MD#(70)  
GND  
MD#(69)  
GND  
MD#(68)  
GND  
MD#(67)  
+1.5V  
MD#(66)  
GND  
MD#(65)  
GND  
MD#(64)  
DSTBN3#  
MD#(63)  
continued  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
Grand Connector to Mem A, J4 and Mem B, J1 (continued)  
Signals  
Pins  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
A
B
C
D
E
GND  
MD#(62)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(61)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(60)  
GND  
DSTBP3#  
GND  
MD#(59)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(58)  
GND  
MUXCLK1  
GND  
GND  
MD#(56)  
GND  
MD#(57)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(55)  
GND  
MD#(54)  
GND  
GND  
Unused  
GND  
Was DCMPLT#  
+1.5V  
Was DVALID#  
GND  
Was WDEVT#  
GND  
MD#(53)  
GND  
MD#(52)  
GND  
MD#(51)  
GND  
MD#(50)  
GND  
MD#(49)  
GND  
MD#(48)  
GND  
DSTBP2#  
GND  
MD#(47)  
+1.5V  
MD#(46)  
GND  
MD#(45)  
GND  
MD#(44)  
GND  
DSTBN2#  
GND  
MD#(43)  
GND  
MD#(42)  
GND  
MD#(41)  
GND  
MD#(40)  
GND  
MD#(39)  
GND  
MD#(38)  
+1.5V  
MD#(37)  
MD#(36)  
Grand Connector Power Module 1 Connector J2  
Signals  
Pins  
A
B
C
D
E
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
5V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Grand Connector Power Module 2 Connector J5  
Signals  
Pins  
A
B
C
D
E
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
P1X1  
P1X2  
P1X3  
P2X1  
P2X2  
P2X3  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
12V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
3.3V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
5V  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7  
Signals  
Pins  
1
A
B
C
D
E
GND  
MD#(36)  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(37)  
GND  
+3.3V  
2
GDCMPLT#  
GND  
DSTBN2#  
GND  
MD#(38)  
+3.3V  
3
MD#(39)  
+3.3V  
MD#(40)  
GND  
4
MD#(41)  
GND  
DSTBP2#  
GND  
MD#(42)  
+3.3V  
5
MD#(43)  
+3.3V  
MD#(44)  
GND  
6
MD#(45)  
GND  
MD#(46)  
GND  
MD#(47)  
+3.3V  
7
MD#(48)  
+3.3V  
MD#(49)  
GND  
8
MD#(50)  
GND  
MD#(51)  
GND  
MD#(52)  
+3.3V  
9
MD#(53)  
+3.3V  
WDEVT#  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
DCMPLT#  
GND  
MD#(54)  
+1.5V  
DVALID#  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(55)  
GND  
MUXCLK1  
GND  
GND  
MD#(56)  
+1.5V  
MD#(57)  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(58)  
GND  
MD#(59)  
GND  
+3.3V  
DSTBP3#  
GND  
MD#(60)  
+3.3V  
MD#(61)  
+3.3V  
MD#(62)  
GND  
MD#(63)  
GND  
DSTBN3#  
GND  
MD#(64)  
+3.3V  
MD#(65)  
+3.3V  
MD#(66)  
GND  
+1.5V  
MD#(67)  
GND  
MD#(68)  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(69)  
+3.3V  
MD#(70)  
GND  
MD#(71)  
GND  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
GND  
CARD_NUM  
+1.5V  
GND  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
+3.3V  
GND  
PWRGD  
GND  
SPARECLK1  
GND  
GND  
PHIT#  
+1.5V  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
+3.3V  
GND  
RHIT#  
GND  
+1.5V  
+3.3V  
CARD#  
+3.3V  
BANK2#  
+3.3V  
GND  
RCMPLT#  
GND  
+3.3V  
GND  
GRCMPLT#  
GND  
+3.3V  
CMND0#  
GND  
BANK0#  
GND  
BANK1#  
+3.3V  
CMND1#  
GND  
+1.5V  
ROW#  
+1.5V  
CSTB#  
+3.3V  
GND  
MA#(0)  
GND  
RCGCLK  
GND  
GND  
MA#(1)  
+1.5V  
MA#(2)  
+3.3V  
GND  
MA#(3)  
GND  
MA#(4)  
GND  
+3.3V  
MA#(7)  
+3.3V  
MA#(12)  
MA#(5)  
GND  
MA#(6)  
+3.3V  
MA#(8)  
GND  
MA#(9)  
GND  
MA#(10)  
GND  
MA#(11)  
+3.3V  
MA#(13)  
continued  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Memory Board 1 & 2 Interface Connector J6 & J7 (continued)  
Signals  
Pins  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
A
B
C
D
E
+1.5V  
+3.3V  
GND  
TMS  
GND  
+3.3V  
GND  
+1.5V  
TRST#  
GND  
+3.3V  
SPARECLK0  
GND  
GND  
TDI  
TDO  
GND  
+1.5V  
TCK  
+3.3V  
MD#(0)  
GND  
+3.3V  
MD#(3)  
+3.3V  
MD#(7)  
+3.3V  
MD#(11)  
+3.3V  
DOFF1#  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(1)  
GND  
GND  
MD#(2)  
+3.3V  
MD#(4)  
GND  
MD#(5)  
GND  
DSTBN0#  
GND  
MD#(6)  
+3.3V  
MD#(8)  
GND  
MD#(9)  
GND  
DSTBP0#  
GND  
MD#(10)  
+3.3V  
MD#(12)  
GND  
MD#(13)  
GND  
MD#(14)  
GND  
MD#(15)  
+3.3V  
DOFF0#  
GND  
MD#(16)  
GND  
DSEL#  
+1.5V  
MRESET#  
+3.3V  
MD#(17)  
GND  
MUXCLK0  
GND  
GND  
MD#(18)  
+1.5V  
MD#(19)  
+3.3V  
GND  
MD#(20)  
GND  
MD#(21)  
GND  
+3.3V  
MD#(24)  
+3.3V  
MD#(28)  
+3.3V  
MD#(31)  
+3.3V  
MD#(22)  
GND  
MD#(23)  
+3.3V  
MD#(25)  
GND  
MD#(26)  
GND  
DSTBP1#  
GND  
MD#(27)  
+3.3V  
MD#(29)  
GND  
GDCMPLT#  
GND  
DSTBN1#  
GND  
MD#(30)  
+3.3V  
MD#(32)  
GND  
MD#(33)  
MD#(34)  
MD#(35)  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 15 Midplane: Description/Voltages  
Power Supply Connectors J8, J9, & J10  
Pin Signal (Description)  
Pin Signal (Description)  
Pin Signal (Description)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
VCC12  
VCC12  
GND  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
VCC12  
37  
38  
38  
40  
41  
42  
VCC12  
VCC12  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
PRED_FAIL_PSxl  
PSx_SCL (I²C SCL)  
PGOOD (AC OK)  
M12V (-12V)  
PSx_SDA (I²C SDA)  
PSx_FAULT  
VBIAS (+24V)  
12V_SENSE  
(12V Rem.Sense)  
7
8
9
VCC5STBY  
25  
26  
27  
P5V_LS (5V Load Share)  
43  
44  
45  
P3_3V_LS  
(3.3V Load Share)  
GND_SENSE  
(Gnd Rem. Sense)  
P12V_LS  
(12V Load Share)  
PWR_ON_SUPPLIES  
spare  
PSxRS3  
PSxRS5  
(+3.3V Rem. Sense)  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
spare  
GND  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
spare  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
VCC5  
VCC5  
VCC5  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
PSx_PRESENT  
GND  
GND  
GND  
VCC3  
VCC3  
VCC3  
VCC3  
VCC3  
VCC3  
GND  
GND  
GND  
VCC5  
VCC5  
VCC5  
Peripheral Power Connector J11  
Pin #  
Signal:  
VCC12  
GND  
Pin #  
11  
Signal:  
VCC12  
GND  
1
2
12  
3
VCC12  
VCC5  
13  
VCC12  
VCC5  
GND  
4
14  
5
GND  
15  
6
VCC5  
16  
VCC5  
GND  
7
GND  
17  
8
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL  
GND  
18  
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA  
GND  
9
19  
10  
PWR_GOOD  
20  
RESET_IIC_L  
White text  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16 Peripheral Bay Backplane: Description  
This chapter describes the peripheral bay backplane and lists its SCSI ID.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Peripheral Bay Backplane  
The WideUltra disk backplane supports hot-swapping of SCA-type SCSI drives, manages the  
enclosure (chassis), and monitors server functions conforming to the SCSI-Accessed  
Fault-Tolerant Enclosures (SAF-TE) specification. The disk backplane provides:  
•
•
•
•
an independent SCSI channel  
two SCA-2 connectors for SCA-type SCSI hard disk drives  
active terminators that terminate the backplane end of the SCSI bus (SCSI-3 compliant)  
power control for each drive that automatically powers down a slot when a drive failure is  
detected and reported or a drive is removed (when a new drive is inserted, the power control  
waits a few moments and then applies power to the new drive)  
three light-emitting diodes (LEDs) for each drive  
•
power LEDs indicate the drives are receiving power  
activity LEDs indicate the drives are being accessed  
drive fault LEDs indicate the failure status of each drive (during server initialization, they  
flash for one second)  
•
•
•
•
intrachassis I2C bus  
I2C bus temperature sensor for each microcontroller  
interchassis I2C bus support, per SAF-TE specification  
serial EEPROM for nonvolatile information storage  
The SCA-2 connectors on the disk backplane provide control signals and power for up to two  
wide/fast 3.5-inch SCA-type SCSI hard disk drives. The backplane receives control signals from a  
Symbios 53C896 host adapter on the PHP I/O baseboard.  
The fault indicator LEDs on the front panel indicate failure status for each drive in the hot-docking  
bays. These indicators get their signals through a cable connected to the front panel connector on  
the disk backplane.  
The temperature sensor on the disk backplane provides temperature information to other devices in  
the server through enclosure service messages.  
The disk backplane power control provides powering down of a drive when a failure is detected  
and reported to the SCSI bus through enclosure service messages. When a new drive is inserted in  
an SCA connector, the power control waits a short time for the drive to become fully seated and  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
then applies power to the drive. Power control also lets you insert and store a spare drive in an  
SCA connector. When a drive fails, the spare drive can be put into service.  
SCSI ID Configurations  
The SCSI chip on the peripheral bay backplane uses the SAF-TE protocol to communicate with  
the I/O baseboard and uses SCSI ID 6.  
Peripheral Bay Backplane Connectors  
A
B
C
D
E
H
G
F
OM07352  
Figure 16-1. Peripheral Bay Backplane  
A. SCSI Hot-Swap connector  
B. SCSI Hot-Swap connector  
C. Power connector  
D. Diskette connector  
E. IDE connector  
F. Power connector  
G. Blindmate connector  
H. SCSI connector  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting  
Configuration Jumpers  
This chapter describes the PHP I/O baseboard and tells how to configure the jumpers.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
PHP Input/Output (I/O) Baseboard Features  
The PHP I/O baseboard provides the primary I/O interface of the server. The baseboard also  
interfaces with the CPU baseboard through the Midplane. The PHP I/O baseboard provides:  
•
three functionally independent PCI buses  
32-bit primary PCI bus  
32-bit secondary PCI bus  
64-bit PCI bus  
•
•
•
•
integrated Symbios 53C896 Dual Channel LVDS controller  
integrated IDE controller that supports one IDE bus  
onboard video, serial, parallel, and universal serial bus (USB) ports  
user-accessible expansion slots  
five 32-bit regular PCI bus slots  
four 64-bit hot-plug PCI bus slots  
one shared 16-bit ISA/32-bit PCI bus slot  
I2C server management interface  
•
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
32-bit PCI Expansion Slots  
Six 32-bit PCI bus master slots (two primary and four secondary) on the PHP I/O baseboard  
provide expansion enhancement. One 32-bit primary slot shares a common chassis expansion slot  
with the ISA slot; you can use the shared slot for either PCI or ISA but not both. The PCI bus  
operates at 33 MHz and provides:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
32-bit memory addressing  
+3.3 V and +5 V environments  
burst transfers of up to 133 MB/sec  
8-, 16-, or 32-bit data transfers  
plug and play configuration  
hierarchical bus to maximize connectivity  
NOTE  
✏
Add-in video boards must be installed in the 32-bit primary PCI slots.  
64-bit PCI Hot-plug Expansion Slots  
Four 64-bit PCI hot-plug bus master slots on the PHP I/O baseboard provide maximum  
performance at the wider bus width.  
NOTE  
✏
Both 32-bit and 64-bit PCI boards may be installed in the 64-bit slots.  
However, the 32-bit boards will not take advantage of the extra bandwidth  
provided by the 64-bit bus.  
Add-in video boards must be installed in the 32-bit primary PCI slots.  
ISA Expansion Slot  
The ISA bus master slot on the PHP I/O baseboard provides for legacy expansion. The ISA slot  
shares a common chassis I/O expansion slot with a 32-bit PCI slot; you can use the shared slot for  
either ISA or PCI but not both. The ISA bus operates at up to 8.33 MHz and provides  
•
•
•
•
•
24-bit memory addressing  
type A transfers at 5.33 MB per second  
type B transfers at 8 MB per second  
8- or 16-bit data transfers  
interrupt sharing  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
PCI Video Controller  
The onboard Cirrus Logic GD5446 PCI VisualMedia accelerator is a 64-bit DRAM-based SVGA  
controller with hardware-accelerated BitBLT transfers of data, video playback, and video capture  
to the frame buffer. The frame buffer is addressable through a 16-Mbyte window consisting of  
three, 4-Mbyte byte-swapping apertures, and a special video aperture. The SVGA controller also  
features a 64-bit GUI BitBLT engine with double-buffered, memory-mapped control registers.  
The control registers are relocatable anywhere in the 64-Kbyte space; this allows multiple devices  
in a single server.  
The SVGA controller is fully compatible with these video standards: CGA, EGA, Hercules  
graphics, MDA, and VGA. The server comes with 2 MB of onboard video DRAM allowing the  
controller to support 132-column text modes and high resolution graphics with 1280 x 1024 x 16  
colors. Depending on the environment, the controller displays up to 16.7 M colors in some video  
resolutions.  
The SVGA controller supports analog VGA monitors (single and multiple frequency, interlaced  
and noninterlaced) with a maximum vertical retrace interlaced frequency of 87 Hz.  
Video Modes  
The CL-GD5446 provides all the standard IBM VGA modes. The following tables show all the  
supported video modes.  
Standard VGA Modes  
Colors  
(number/  
palette  
size)  
Pixel  
Freq.  
(MHz)  
Horiz.  
Freq.  
(KHz)  
Vert.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Modes  
in Hex  
Char. x Char.  
Display  
Mode  
Row  
Cell  
Resolution  
360 X 400  
720 X 400  
320 X 200  
640 X 200  
720 X 400  
320 X 200  
640 X 200  
640 X 350  
640 X 350  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
320 X 200  
0, 1  
2, 3  
4, 5  
6
16/256K  
16/256K  
4/256K  
2/256K  
Mono  
40 x 25  
80 x 25  
40 x 25  
80 x 25  
80 x 25  
40 x 25  
80 x 25  
80 x 25  
80 x 25  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
9 x 16  
9 x 16  
8 x 8  
Text  
14  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
31.5  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
70  
60  
72  
75  
60  
72  
75  
85  
70  
Text  
28  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Text  
12.5  
25  
8 x 8  
7
9 x 16  
8 x 8  
28  
D
16/256K  
16/256K  
Mono  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
Graphics  
12.5  
25  
E
8 x 14  
8 x 14  
8 x 14  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 16  
8 x 8  
F
25  
10  
11  
11*  
11*  
12  
12*  
12*  
12*  
13  
16/256K  
2/256K  
2/256K  
2/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
25  
25  
31.5  
31.5  
25  
31.5  
31.5  
35.8  
12.5  
256/256K 40 x 25  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Extended VGA Modes  
Colors  
(number/  
palette size)  
Pixel  
Freq.  
(MHz)  
Horiz.  
Freq.  
(KHz)  
Vert.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Mode(s)  
in Hex  
Char. x  
Row  
Char.  
Cell  
Resolution  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
640 x 400  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
58, 6A  
58, 6A  
58, 6A  
58, 6A  
5C  
5C  
5C  
5C  
5C  
5D*  
5D  
5D  
5D*  
5D  
5E  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
16/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
64K  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
100 x 37  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
80 x 25  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
80 x 30  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
128 x 48  
-
36  
35.2  
37.8  
48.1  
46.9  
35.2  
37.9  
48.1  
46.9  
53.7  
35.5  
48.3  
56  
56  
60  
72  
75  
56  
60  
72  
75  
85  
43  
60  
70  
72  
75  
70  
60  
72  
75  
85  
43  
60  
70  
72  
75  
85  
60  
72  
75  
85  
56  
60  
72  
75  
85  
60  
72  
40  
50  
49.5  
36  
40  
50  
49.5  
56.25  
44.9  
65  
75  
77  
58  
78.5  
25  
60  
31.5  
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
35.5  
48.3  
56  
5F  
25  
5F  
31.5  
31.5  
36  
5F  
5F  
60*  
60  
44.9  
65  
60  
75  
60  
77  
58  
60  
78.7  
94.5  
25  
60  
60  
68.3  
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
35.2  
37.8  
48.1  
46.9  
53.7  
31.5  
37.9  
64  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
64  
64K  
-
31.5  
31.5  
36  
64  
64K  
-
64  
64K  
-
65  
64K  
-
36  
65  
64K  
-
40  
65  
64K  
-
50  
65  
64K  
-
49.5  
56.25  
25  
65  
64K  
32K‡  
32K‡  
-
66  
-
66  
-
31.5  
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.  
continued  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Extended VGA Modes (continued)  
Colors  
(number/  
palette size)  
Pixel  
Freq.  
(MHz)  
Horiz.  
Freq.  
(KHz)  
Vert.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Mode(s)  
in Hex  
Char. x  
Row  
Char.  
Cell  
Resolution  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
800 X 600  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 1024  
1280 x 1024  
1280 X 1024  
1280 X 1024  
1280 X 1024  
1280 X 1024  
1280 X 1024  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
640 X 480  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1024 X 768  
1280 X 1024  
800 x 600  
66  
66  
67  
67  
67  
67  
67  
68  
68  
68  
68  
68  
69*  
69*  
6C*  
6D*  
6D  
6D  
6D  
71  
71  
71  
71  
74*  
74  
74  
74  
74  
75*  
78  
78  
78  
78  
78  
79  
79  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
32K‡  
-
-
31.5  
36  
37.5  
43.3  
35.2  
37.8  
48.1  
46.9  
53.7  
35.5  
48.3  
56  
75  
85  
56  
60  
72  
75  
85  
43  
60  
70  
75  
85  
43  
60  
43  
43  
60  
71.2  
75  
60  
72  
75  
85  
43  
60  
70  
75  
85  
43  
56  
60  
72  
75  
85  
43  
60  
-
-
-
-
36  
-
-
40  
-
-
50  
-
-
49.5  
56.25  
44.9  
65  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
75  
-
-
78.7  
94.5  
75  
60  
-
-
68.3  
48  
-
-
-
-
108  
75  
65  
16/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
256/256K  
16M  
160 x 64  
8 x 16  
48  
160 x 64  
8 x 16  
75  
48  
160 x 64  
8 x 16  
108  
126  
135  
25  
65  
160 x 64  
8 x 16  
76  
160 x 64  
8 x 16  
80  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
31.5  
37.9  
37.5  
43.3  
35.5  
48.3  
56  
16M  
31.5  
31.5  
36  
16M  
16M  
64K‡  
44.9  
65  
64K  
64K  
75  
64K  
78.7  
94.5  
75  
60  
64K  
64K‡  
68.3  
48  
16M  
36  
35.2  
37.8  
48.1  
46.9  
53.7  
35.5  
483  
16M  
800 x 600  
40  
16M  
800 x 600  
50  
16M  
800 x 600  
49.5  
56.25  
44.9  
65  
16M  
800 x 600  
16M  
800 x 600  
16M  
1024 x 768  
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.  
continued  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Extended VGA Modes (continued)  
Colors  
(number/  
palette size)  
Pixel  
Freq.  
(MHz)  
Horiz.  
Freq.  
(KHz)  
Vert.  
Freq.  
(Hz)  
Mode(s)  
in Hex  
Char. x  
Row  
Char.  
Cell  
Resolution  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1024 x 768  
1152 x 864  
1152 x 864  
1152 x 864  
1152 x 864  
79  
79  
79  
7C  
7C  
7D  
7D  
16M  
-
-
75  
56  
70  
75  
85  
70  
75  
70  
75  
16M  
-
-
78.7  
94.5  
94.5  
108  
94.5  
94.5  
60  
16M  
-
-
68.3  
63.9  
67.5  
63.9  
67.5  
256/256K  
256/256K  
64K  
144 x 54  
8 x 16  
144 x 54  
8 x 16  
-
-
-
-
64K  
* Interlaced Mode. ‡ 32K Direct-Color/256-Color Mixed Mode.  
Symbios 53C896 SCSI Controller  
A Symbios 53C896 LVDS SCSI controller provides embedded SCSI on the primary 32-bit PCI  
bus. The configuration registers define PCI-related parameters for the 53C896 device. The  
53C896 supports all mandatory registers in the PCI configuration space header, including the  
vendor ID, device ID, class code, revision ID, header type, and command and status fields.  
The 53C896 supports two LVDS channels. One channel controls slow devices such as CD-ROMs,  
and DVDs; the other channel provides a high speed connection to the internal LVDS drives or an  
external disk array.  
IDE Controller  
The PIIX4 multifunction device on the PHP I/O baseboard acts as a PCI-based Fast IDE controller  
that supports:  
•
•
•
•
•
PIO and IDE DMA/bus master operations  
Mode 4 timings  
transfer rates up to 33 MB/sec  
buffering for PCI/IDE burst transfers  
master/slave IDE mode  
Server Management (SM)  
During normal operation, SM receives information about the status of the server. SM also  
monitors the power supply voltages and operating temperature of the server. If SM determines  
that the server is not operating within specified limits, it attempts to notify a supervisor or an  
administrator about the condition of the server. The microcontrollers on the front panel board, disk  
backplane, and PHP I/O baseboard implement the server management features.  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Front Panel Controller (FPC)  
Where located: on the front panel board  
What it manages:  
•
server power control consolidation from several sources  
push-button power signal from the front panel connector  
real-time clock (RTC)  
server monitor module (SMM), if installed  
commands from the Intelligent Platform Management Bus (IPMB)  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
power and reset switch interfaces  
fault LEDs  
chassis, midplane and power supplies Field Replacement Unit (FRU) inventory interface  
server hard reset generation  
server power fault indication  
Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB) bridge device  
EMP connection  
LCD interface  
Board Management Controller (BMC)  
Where located: on the PHP I/O baseboard  
What it provides:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
temperature and voltage monitoring of the I/O and CPU baseboards  
threshold comparison functions  
SMI (systems management interrupt) generation  
watchdog timer and certain GPIO (general purpose input/output) functions  
fault-resilient booting  
processor presence, Voltage ID (VID), IERR, and thermal trip monitoring  
server event log, event time stamping, sensor data record information, and DIMM ID  
information interface  
•
current event status and sensor readings when polled by System Management Software  
Hot-swap Controller (HSC)  
Where located: on the disk backplane  
What it does:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
implements the SAF-TE command set  
controls the fault lights and drive power-on  
provides a path for management information via SCSI  
retrieves drive fault status, backplane temperature, and fan failure information via the IPMB  
queries the status of the front panel controller for power supply information  
controls drive power-on and power-down, facilitating hot-swapping  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
I/O Riser Card  
The I/O riser card contains all the legacy I/O connections such as video, keyboard, mouse, etc.  
The card plugs into the legacy connector on the PHP I/O baseboard and provides the following  
external connectors:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
PS/2-compatible keyboard (interchangeable with the mouse)  
PS/2-compatible mouse (interchangeable with the keyboard)  
parallel port  
two serial ports  
VGA video port  
ICMB connector interface  
I
A
H
G
F
C
B
E
D
OM08099  
Figure 17-1. I/O Riser Card  
A. I/O riser card  
B. USB (connectors mounted on PHP I/O baseboard)  
C. Parallel port  
D. Video port  
E. Serial port 2  
F. Serial port 1  
G. Keyboard port  
H. Mouse port  
I. ICMB connector  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
PHP I/O Baseboard Configuration Jumpers  
You can use the configuration jumpers on the PHP I/O baseboard to recover a BIOS, clear a  
CMOS password, or clear all CMOS settings. Figure 17-2 shows the jumper positions for the  
default system configuration. The reserved pins may not be populated in shipping configurations.  
Table 17-1 shows the minimum default configurations in bold face type.  
J2C1  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
A
B
C
A
B
OM08476  
Figure 17-2. J2C1 Configuration Jumper Block  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Table 17-1. Configuration Jumpers (J2C1)  
Pins (default in bold)  
Function  
1(B–C)  
1(A–B)  
2(B–C)  
2(A–B)  
3(B–C)  
3(A–B)  
4(B–C)  
4(A–B)  
5(B–C)  
5(A–B)  
6(B–C)  
6(A–B)  
7(B–C)  
7(A–B)  
8(B–C)  
8(A–B)  
Disable programming onboard programmable devices  
Allow programming of onboard programmable devices  
Normal boot  
Boot Recovery BIOS  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Allow BIOS flash update  
Disable BIOS flash update  
Do not clear CMOS  
Clear CMOS  
Do not clear password  
Clear password  
Do not override PHP switches  
Override PHP switches  
Disable I/O SPI chain  
Allow I/O SPI chain  
Restoring CMOS to Default Values  
The jumper on J2C1 pins 5(B-C) preserves the settings stored in CMOS nonvolatile memory  
(NVRAM) during server reset. Moving the jumper to pins 5(A-B) clears CMOS and sets it and the  
real-time clock (RTC) to the Setup default values during server reset.  
To clear CMOS and restore the Setup default values:  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.  
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
4. Move the jumper on J2C1 from pins 5(B-C) to pins 5(A-B).  
5. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.  
6. Turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. This automatically restores CMOS and  
RTC to Setup default values. See Chapter 3, “Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”  
7. Turn off the server, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.  
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 5(A-B) to pins 5(B-C).  
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.  
10. Run the SSU to configure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Clearing the Password  
The jumper on J2C1 pins 6(B-C) protects the CMOS password during server reset. Moving the  
jumper to pins 6(A-B) clears the password during server reset.  
To clear the CMOS password:  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.  
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
4. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6(B-C) to pins 6(A-B).  
5. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.  
6. Turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. This automatically clears the password.  
See Chapter 3, “Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”  
7. Turn off the server, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.  
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 6(A-B) to pins 6(B-C).  
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.  
10. Run the SSU to configure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
Updating the BIOS  
The jumper on J2C1 pins 4(B-C) applies +12 V power to the VPP pin on the flash memory device.  
This allows you to update the BIOS in flash memory with the Flash Update Utility. Moving the  
jumper to pins 4(A-B) protects the contents of flash memory.  
NOTE  
✏
For a copy of the latest system BIOS release to create a Flash update utility  
diskette, contact your dealer or sales representative.  
Before you can update the system BIOS from the Flash Update Utility diskette, you must make the  
diskette MS-DOS bootable. You must have either MS-DOS version 5.00 or 6.00 (or greater)  
installed on C:\DOS. To prevent accidentally installing a BIOS for a different type of system, the  
update utility insures that the BIOS matches the target system.  
NOTE  
✏
Please review the update utility instructions and the release notes distributed  
with the update utility and BIOS code before attempting to update the BIOS.  
The BIOS update utility allows you to update the  
•
•
•
BIOS in flash memory  
user and logo area of the BIOS  
language section of the BIOS  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Recording the Current BIOS Settings  
Before updating the BIOS, record your current BIOS settings. You will need them to configure  
your server at the end of the update procedure.  
1. Turn on your video monitor and your server. Each time you turn on or reboot your server  
POST begins and, after a few seconds, displays this message:  
Press <F2> to enter Setup  
2. After pressing F2, a few seconds may pass before entering Setup while POST completes tests  
and initialization functions. When Setup is entered, write down the current settings.  
Creating the BIOS Update Diskette  
The BIOS update file is a compressed self-extracting archive that contains the files you need to  
update the BIOS.  
1. Copy the BIOS update file to a temporary directory on your hard disk.  
2. From the C:\ prompt, change to the temporary directory.  
3. To extract the file, type the name of the BIOS update file; for example, type 10006BI1.EXE  
and press <Enter>. The extracted files include  
• LICENSE.TXT—software license agreement  
• README.TXT—instructions for the BIOS update  
• BIOINSTR.TXT—instructions for creating a bootable diskette  
• BIOS.EXE—BIOS update software  
4. Insert the bootable diskette into drive A.  
5. Change to the temporary directory that holds the BIOS.EXEfile.  
6. Type BIOS A:and press <Enter> to extract the BIOS.EXEfile to the diskette.  
NOTE  
✏
If the extracted files do not include the BIOS.EXEfile, you must extract the  
BIOS update file directly to the bootable diskette in drive A.  
Example: type 10006BI1 A:and press <Enter>.  
Running the BIOS Update Utility  
Remember to write down the current BIOS settings before running the BIOS update utility.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 111, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Insert the update diskette into drive A, and turn on the monitor and server. When the server  
boots from the diskette, follow the screen prompts.  
If you choose option 1, the server will automatically reboot after the update process completes  
so that the changes will take effect. Remove the diskette when the server starts to boot.  
If you choose option 2, you must reboot the server by pressing reset or <Enter> after the update  
process completes for the changes to take effect. Remove the diskette when the server starts to  
boot.  
3. As the server boots, check the BIOS identifier—version number—to make sure the update was  
successful.  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
4. When the following message appears, press <F2>.  
Press <F2> to enter SETUP  
5. After entering Setup, press <F9> to load Setup defaults; then press <Enter> to confirm.  
6. Set the Setup options to the settings you wrote down before updating the BIOS.  
7. Press <F10> to exit and save the settings; then press <Enter> to confirm and to reboot the  
server.  
8. To protect the contents of flash memory, turn off the server, unplug the power cords from the  
power supplies or wall outlets, and remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12,  
“Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
9. Move the jumper from J2C1B pins 4(B-C) to pins 4(A-B) to write-protect the flash memory  
device.  
10. Reinstall the covers, plug in the power cords, and turn on the server.  
NOTE  
✏
If the system BIOS becomes corrupted during the update process—for  
example, a power outage occurs—follow the “Recovering the BIOS”  
procedure on page 197.  
Recovering the BIOS  
Moving the boot option jumper on J2C1 from pins 2(B-C) to pins 2(A-B) enables the BIOS flash  
memory boot recovery mode. The BIOS can be corrupted—for example, when the update  
procedure is aborted due to a power outage. However, flash memory contains a protected area that  
cannot be corrupted. Code in this area is used to boot the server from drive A when the BIOS has  
been corrupted. After booting, the Flash Update Utility (IFLASH) is used to automatically recover  
the BIOS from the BIOS recovery files on the diskette.  
To recover the BIOS:  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the AC power cords from the power supplies or wall outlets.  
3. Remove the top and right side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
4. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2(B-C) to pins 2(A-B) to allow the server to boot from the  
recovery BIOS.  
5. Reinstall the top and side covers, plug in the power cords, and insert the Flash Update Utility  
diskette in drive A.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
6. Turn on the monitor and server. After the server boots, the speaker emits a single beep and the  
recovery process starts—it takes about three minutes. When the recovery process completes,  
the speaker emits two beeps.  
While in the recovery mode, there is no screen display on the monitor. The keyboard is  
disabled as the server automatically recovers the BIOS. The following beep codes describe the  
recovery status.  
Beep Code  
Message  
1
2
4
Recovery process starting.  
Successful completion, no errors.  
The server could not boot from the diskette; it may not be bootable.  
Continuous series  
of low beeps  
The wrong BIOS recovery files are being used and/or the flash memory jumper  
is in the wrong position.  
7. After successful completion of restoring the recovery BIOS, remove the diskette, turn off the  
server and monitor, unplug the power cords, and remove the top and right side covers.  
8. Move the jumper from J2C1 pins 2(A-B) to pins 2(B-C)—the normal boot mode.  
9. Reinstall the covers, and plug in the power cords.  
10. After running the special recovery mode, run the SSU to specify a new password. See  
Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
Updating BMC, FPC, and HCS Firmware  
For a copy of the latest BMC, FPC, and HSC firmware releases, contact your dealer or sales  
representative.  
Before you can update the firmware from the firmware update diskettes, you must make them  
MS-DOS bootable. You must have MS-DOS version 6.00 (or greater) installed on C:\DOS.  
NOTE  
✏
Please review the firmware release notes distributed with the firmware  
update package before attempting to update the firmware of any  
microcontroller.  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Boot Sequence  
The PHP I/O baseboard provides the server with a variety of methods for detecting and booting an  
operating system. The BIOS scans devices and user configurable option slots in a specific  
sequence. Knowing the precise sequence the BIOS detects, sets up, and boots, assists in defining  
the server configuration.  
Location  
Bus  
IDSEL  
Comment  
J1E2  
ISA  
None  
Floppy Drive  
J3B1  
J1G2  
P1  
ISA  
None  
None  
25  
Compatibility (Legacy) Boot Slot 11  
IDE  
Primary IDE  
Primary PCI  
Primary PCI  
Primary PCI  
Primary PCI  
Primary PCI  
Secondary PCI  
Secondary PCI  
Secondary PCI  
Secondary PCI  
Secondary PCI  
64 Bit PCI  
Expansion Slot 1  
On board SCSI  
Expansion Slot 1  
On board Video  
PIIX4 Component  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
PID Component  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
Expansion Slot  
J2G1  
P2  
26  
27  
U4G1  
U3D1  
P3  
28  
31  
20  
P4  
21  
P5  
22  
P6  
23  
U7E2  
P7  
25  
20  
P8  
64 Bit PCI  
21  
P9  
64 Bit PCI  
22  
P10  
64 Bit PCI  
23  
1. Install user supplied video adapters only in slots P1 or P2.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
PHP I/O Baseboard Layout  
A B  
C D  
E
F
G
H
I
N
J
M
L
K
OM07313  
Figure 17-3. PHP I/O Baseboard Layout  
A. J1G2, Primary IDE port  
B. J2G1, Primary SCSI port  
C. J1E2, Diskette drive port  
D. J2E2, Secondary SCSI port  
E. J1C1, I2C feature connector  
F. J2C1, jumper block  
G. J1A1, USB connector  
H. J2A1, I/O riser card connector  
I. J3B1, 16-bit ISA expansion slot  
J. P1-P6, 32-bit PCI expansion slots  
K. P7-P1064-bit PCI expansion slots  
L. Expander bus power connectors  
M. Expander bus signal connector  
N. B3G1, Battery  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
PHP I/O Baseboard Connectors  
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section  
Signal  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
Pin  
C1  
COM2_TO_FP_EN  
IO_TCK  
GND  
GND  
A2  
XIMB_SOUT_EN  
GND  
B2  
SIN_TTL_COM2  
IO_TMS  
C2  
IO_TDO  
A3  
B3  
C3  
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
NMI_5V  
A4  
IO_TDI  
B4  
PWRGDB  
A20M_L  
C4  
A5  
GND  
B5  
C5  
A6  
CPU_SPI_RESET_L  
GND  
B6  
PROC_RESET_L  
GND  
C6  
A7  
B7  
C7  
A8  
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)  
GND  
B8  
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)  
SMI_L  
C8  
A9  
B9  
C9  
GND  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
IGNNE_L  
GND  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA  
GND  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C20  
C21  
C22  
C23  
C24  
C25  
C26  
C27  
C28  
C29  
C30  
C31  
C32  
C33  
C34  
C35  
X0D_L(0)  
X0D_L(1)  
X0XRTS_L  
GND  
X0HRTS_L  
GND  
X0D_L(3)  
X0D_L(4)  
X0D_L(2)  
GND  
X0BE_L(0)  
GND  
GND  
X0D_L(6)  
X0D_L(5)  
GND  
X0PAR_L  
GND  
X0D_L(8)  
X0D_L(9)  
X0D_L(7)  
GND  
X0ADS_L  
X0D_L(11)  
X0BE_L(1)  
X0XSTBN_L  
GND  
GND  
X0D_L(12)  
X0D_L(14)  
X0D_L(15)  
GND  
X0D_L(10)  
GND  
X0D_L(13)  
GND  
DOFF0_L  
GND  
X0CLK  
GND  
GND  
DVALIDA_L  
DOFF1_L  
GND  
DSR_TTL_FP  
GND  
CTS_TTL_FP  
RI_TTL_FP  
ISP_SDO  
INTRUSION_L  
ISP_SDI  
ISP_FPC_SDO  
GND  
RTS_TTL_FP  
GND  
DTR_TTL_FP  
SPEAKER_DATA  
GND  
FAN_FAILED  
GND  
VCC_STDBY  
I2C_FPC_SCL  
I2C_FPC_SDA  
GND  
VCC_STDBY  
GND  
HARD_RESET  
GND  
I2C_DS2P_SDA  
GND  
I2C_DS2P_SCL  
GND  
X1D_L(0)  
continued  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section A, B, & C (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
X1D_L(1)  
X1D_L(3)  
X1D_L(4)  
GND  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
A48  
X1XRTS_L  
GND  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
B48  
X1HRTS_L  
GND  
C36  
C37  
C38  
C39  
C40  
C41  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C45  
C46  
C47  
C48  
X1D_L(2)  
GND  
X1BE_L(0)  
GND  
X1D_L(6)  
X1D_L(8)  
X1D_L(9)  
GND  
X1D_L(5)  
GND  
X1PAR_L  
GND  
X1D_L(7)  
GND  
X1ADS_L  
X1D_L(11)  
X1BE_L(1)  
X1XSTBN_L  
GND  
X1D_L(12)  
X1D_L(14)  
X1D_L(15)  
GND  
X1D_L(10)  
GND  
X1D_L(13)  
GND  
5V_SENSE  
GND  
X1CLK  
5V_RET_SENSE  
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section D & E  
Signal  
Pin  
D1  
Signal  
PIC_CLK  
GND  
Pin  
E1  
COM2_SIO_EN_A_  
STP_CLK_L  
IO_TRST_L  
PICD(0)  
D2  
E2  
D3  
PICD(1)  
GND  
E3  
D4  
E4  
INIT_L  
D5  
RESET_PWR_DIST_L  
GND  
E5  
GND  
D6  
E6  
BMC_SPI_BUS(2)  
GND  
D7  
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)  
GND  
E7  
D8  
E8  
X0IB_L  
D9  
CIB_INT0  
GND  
E9  
IO_PWRGD  
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL  
GND  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
D17  
D18  
D19  
D20  
D21  
D22  
E10  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
E16  
E17  
E18  
E19  
E20  
E21  
E22  
INTR  
GND  
DSEL0_L  
GND  
FERR_L  
GND  
DCMPLTA_L  
GND  
X0BLK_L  
GND  
SIN_TTL_XIMB  
GND  
X0RST_L  
GND  
SOUT_TTL_COM2  
GND  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
DCD_TTL_FP  
GND  
X0XSTBP_L  
GND  
WDEVT_L  
continued  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Expander Bus Connector: Signal Section D & E (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
X0HSTBP_L  
X0HSTBN_L  
ISP_MODE  
ISP_CLK  
D23  
D24  
D25  
D26  
D27  
D28  
D29  
D30  
D31  
D32  
D33  
D34  
D35  
D36  
D37  
D38  
D39  
D40  
D41  
D42  
D43  
D44  
D45  
D46  
D47  
D48  
GND  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
DCMPLTB_L  
ISP_EN_L  
GND  
ISP_FPC_EN_L  
(-12V)  
(-12V)  
GND  
DVALIDB_L  
GND  
CPU_SLP_L  
GND  
FP_T0_PIIX4_PWRBTN  
DSEL1_L  
SECURE_MODE_BMC  
GND  
X1IB_L  
PWR_GOOD  
PS_PWR_ON  
FP_NMI_SWT_L  
GND  
GND  
PWR_CNTR_SFC  
GND  
PWR_CNTR_RTC_L  
GND  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC  
GND  
I2C_CEL CONNECT_BMC  
GND  
X1BLK_L  
GND  
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
GND  
X1RST_L  
GND  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
GND  
MIOC_INTREQ_L  
GND  
X1XSTBP_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
X1HSTBP_L  
X1HSTBN_L  
GND  
GND  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Expander Bus Connector: Power Section  
Connectors J10H1C and J10H1D  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1 +12V  
P1C2 +12V  
P1C3 +12V  
P2C1 +12V  
P2C2 +12V  
P2C3 +12V  
P1D1 +5V  
P1D2 +5V  
P1D3 +5V  
P2D1 +5V  
P2D2 +5V  
P2D3 +5V  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Connector J4H1D and J10H1B  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1 +12V  
P1C2 +12V  
P1C3 +12V  
P2C1 +12V  
P2C2 +12V  
P2C3 +12V  
P1D1 +5V  
P1D2 +5V  
P1D3 +5V  
P2D1 +5V  
P2D2 +5V  
P2D3 +5V  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Connectors J4H1B  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1 +12V  
P1C2 +12V  
P1C3 +12V  
P2C1 +12V  
P2C2 +12V  
P2C3 +12V  
P1D1 +12V  
P1D2 +12V  
P1D3 +12V  
P2D1 +12V  
P2D2 +12V  
P2D3 +12V  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Connector J4H1C  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1 +12V  
P1C2 +12V  
P1C3 +12V  
P2C1 +12V  
P2C2 +12V  
P2C3 +12V  
P1D1 +5V  
P1D2 +5V  
P1D3 +5V  
P2D1 +5V  
P2D2 +5V  
P2D3 +5V  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
32-bit PCI Connector  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
TRST_L  
+12 V  
Pin  
Signal  
AD16  
+3.3 V  
FRAME_L  
GND  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
-12 V  
Pin  
Signal  
AD17  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
A48  
A49  
A50  
A51  
A52  
A53  
A54  
A55  
A56  
A57  
A58  
A59  
A60  
A61  
A62  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
B48  
B49  
B50  
B51  
B52  
B53  
B54  
B55  
B56  
B57  
B58  
B59  
B60  
B61  
B62  
A2  
B2  
TCK  
C/BE2_L  
GND  
A3  
TMS  
B3  
GND (Ground)  
TDO  
A4  
TDI  
B4  
IRDY_L  
+3.3 V  
DEVSEL_L  
GND  
A5  
+5 V  
TRDY_L  
GND  
B5  
+5 V  
A6  
INTA_L  
INTC_L  
+5 V  
B6  
+5 V  
A7  
STOP_L  
+3.3 V  
SDONE  
SB0_L  
GND  
B7  
INTB_L  
INTD_L  
PRSNT1_L  
RESERVED  
PRSNT2_L  
GND‡  
A8  
B8  
LOCK_L  
PERR_L  
+3.3 V  
SERR_L  
+3.3 V  
C/BE1_L  
AD14  
A9  
RESERVED  
+5 V  
B9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
RESERVED  
GND‡  
PAR  
†
GND‡  
AD15  
+3.3 V  
AD13  
AD11  
GND  
GND‡  
RESERVED  
RESET_L  
+5 V  
RESERVED  
GND  
GND  
CLK  
AD12  
GRANT_L  
GND  
GND  
AD10  
AD9  
REQ_L  
+5 V  
GND  
RESERVED  
AD30  
KEY  
KEY  
KEY  
AD31  
KEY  
+3.3 V  
AD28  
C/BE0_L  
+3.3 V  
AD6  
AD29  
AD8  
GND  
AD7  
AD26  
AD27  
+3.3 V  
AD5  
GND  
AD4  
AD25  
AD24  
GND  
+3.3 V  
C/BE3_L  
AD23  
AD3  
IDSEL  
+3.3 V  
AD22  
AD2  
GND  
AD0  
AD1  
+5 V  
GND  
+5 V  
AD20  
REQ64_L  
+5 V  
AD21  
ACK64_L  
+5 V  
GND  
AD19  
AD18  
+5 V  
+3.3 V  
+5 V  
*
The cross (‡) symbol after the signal indicates that the slot serves +5 V compliant devices only.  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
64-bit PCI Connector  
For pins A1–A62 and B1–B62, the 64-bit PCI connector is identical to the 32-bit PCI connector.  
The table below shows the additional extension pins for the 64-bit PCI connector.  
Pin  
Signal  
GND (Ground)  
C/BE7_L  
C/BE5_L  
+5 V  
Pin  
Signal  
RESERVED  
GND  
A63  
A64  
A65  
A66  
A67  
A68  
A69  
A70  
A71  
A72  
A73  
A74  
A75  
A76  
A77  
A78  
A79  
A80  
A81  
A82  
A83  
A84  
A85  
A86  
A87  
A88  
A89  
A90  
A91  
A92  
A93  
A94  
B63  
B64  
B65  
B66  
B67  
B68  
B69  
B70  
B71  
B72  
B73  
B74  
B75  
B76  
B77  
B78  
B79  
B80  
B81  
B82  
B83  
B84  
B85  
B86  
B87  
B88  
B89  
B90  
B91  
B92  
B93  
B94  
C/BE6_L  
C/BE4_L  
GND  
PAR64  
AD62  
AD63  
GND  
AD61  
AD60  
+5 V  
AD58  
AD59  
GND  
AD57  
AD56  
GND  
AD54  
AD55  
+5 V  
AD53  
AD52  
GND  
AD50  
AD51  
GND  
AD49  
AD48  
+5 V  
AD46  
AD47  
GND  
AD45  
AD44  
GND  
AD42  
AD43  
+5 V  
AD41  
AD40  
+5 V  
AD38  
AD39  
GND  
AD37  
AD36  
+5 V  
AD34  
AD35  
GND  
AD33  
AD32  
GND  
RESERVED  
GND  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
GND  
RESERVED  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
ISA Connector  
The ISA connector on the PHP I/O baseboard follows the standard pinout given in the ISA  
Specification.  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
GND (Ground)  
RESET  
+5 V  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
IOCHK_L  
SD7  
B2  
A2  
B3  
A3  
SD6  
B4  
IRQ9  
A4  
SD5  
B5  
-5 V  
A5  
SD4  
B6  
DRQ2  
A6  
SD3  
B7  
-12 V  
A7  
SD2  
B8  
SRDY_L  
+12 V  
A8  
SD1  
B9  
A9  
SD0  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
Key  
D1  
GND  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
Key  
C1  
IOCHRDY  
AEN  
SMEMW_L  
SMEMR_L  
IOW_L  
IOR_L  
SA19  
SA18  
SA17  
SA16  
SA15  
SA14  
SA13  
SA12  
SA11  
SA10  
SA9  
DACK3_L  
DRQ3  
DACK1_L  
DRQ1  
REFRESH_L  
BCLK  
IRQ7  
IRQ6  
IRQ5  
SA8  
IRQ4  
SA7  
IRQ3  
SA6  
DACK2_L  
TC  
SA5  
SA4  
BALE  
SA3  
+5 V  
SA2  
OSC 14 MHz  
GND  
SA1  
SA0  
MEMCS16_L  
IOCS16_L  
IRQ10  
SBHE_L  
LA23  
D2  
C2  
D3  
C3  
LA22  
continued  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
ISA Connector (continued)  
Pin  
D4  
Signal  
Pin  
C4  
Signal  
LA21  
IRQ11  
D5  
IRQ12  
C5  
LA20  
D6  
IRQ15  
C6  
LA19  
D7  
IRQ14D  
DACK0_L  
DRQ0  
C7  
LA18  
D8  
C8  
LA17  
D9  
C9  
MEMR_L  
MEMW_L  
SD8  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
D17  
D18  
DACK5_L  
DRQ5  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
DACK6_L  
DRQ6  
SD9  
SD10  
SD11  
SD12  
SD13  
SD14  
SD15  
DACK7_L  
DRQ7  
+5 V  
MASTER16_L  
GND  
Diskette Drive Port  
Pin  
1
Name  
Pin  
2
Name  
GND (Ground)  
GND  
FD_DENSEL  
No Connection  
FD_DRATE0  
FD_INDEX_L  
FD_MTR0_L  
FD_DR1_L  
3
4
5
Key  
6
7
GND  
8
9
GND  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
GND  
GND  
FD_DR0_L  
GND  
FD_MTR1_L  
FD_DIR_L  
FD_MSEN1  
GND  
FD_STEP_L  
FD_WDATA_L  
FD_WGATE_L  
FD_TRK0_L  
FD_WPROT_L  
FD_RDATA_L  
FD_HDSEL_L  
FD_DSKCHG_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
FD_MSEN0  
GND  
GND  
GND  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Wide/Fast 16-bit SCSI Port  
Signal Name  
GND (Ground)  
GND  
Conn. Pin  
1
Cable Pin  
1
Cable Pin  
2
Conn. Pin  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
Signal Name  
DB12_L  
DB13_L  
DB14_L  
DB15_L  
DBP1_L  
DB0_L  
DB1_L  
DB2_L  
DB3_L  
DB4_L  
DB5_L  
DB6_L  
DB7_L  
DBP_L  
GND  
2
3
4
GND  
3
5
6
GND  
4
7
8
GND  
5
9
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
62  
64  
66  
68  
GND  
6
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
61  
63  
65  
67  
GND  
7
GND  
8
GND  
9
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
TERMPWR  
TERMPWR  
RESERVED  
GND  
TERMPWR  
TERMPWR  
RESERVED  
GND  
GND  
ATN_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
BSY_L  
ACK_L  
RST_L  
MSG_L  
SEL_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
C/D_L  
GND  
REQ_L  
I/O_L  
GND  
GND  
DB8_L  
DB9_L  
DB10_L  
DB11_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
IDE Port  
Pin  
1
Signal  
RSTDRV  
DD7  
Pin  
2
Signal  
GND (Ground)  
DD8  
3
4
5
DD6  
6
DD9  
7
DD5  
8
DD10  
9
DD4  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
DD11  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
DD3  
DD12  
DD2  
DD13  
DD1  
DD14  
DD0  
DD15  
GND  
KEY PIN  
GND  
DRQ  
DIOW  
DIOR  
IORDY  
DACK  
IRQ  
GND  
GND  
CSEL  
GND  
No connection  
No connection  
DA2  
DA1  
DA0  
CS1P_L  
DHACT_L  
DS3P_L  
GND  
I2C Feature Connector  
Pin  
Name  
Pin Name  
1
SMI#  
2
I2CCLK  
key  
3
CONP  
4
5
PWROFF#  
LPOK  
6
I2CDATA  
KEYUNLK  
HostAUX  
GND  
7
8
9
NMI  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
RESET#  
GND  
key  
SECURE  
INTRUD#  
INIT_L  
GND  
NMI_L  
GND  
KB_DATA  
KB_CLK  
Key  
MS_DATA  
MS_CLK  
RESET_BMC_L  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
I2C Connector  
Pin  
1
Signal  
CLK  
2
GND  
3
DATA  
Front Panel Connector  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
2
Signal  
GND (Ground)  
VCC_STDBY  
ISP_SCLK  
+5V  
3
4
GND  
5
6
FAN_FAILED_L  
SPEAKER_DATA  
INTRUSION_L  
RESERVED  
7
ISP_SDI  
8
9
ISP_FPC_EN_L  
ISP_MODE  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
42  
44  
46  
48  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
60  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
41  
43  
45  
47  
49  
51  
53  
55  
57  
59  
ISP_FPC_SDO  
VCC_STDBY  
GND  
GND  
BMC_TO_FPC_RST_CMD  
PROC_RESET_L  
SYS_RESET_STATE  
RST_SFC_L  
COM2_TO_FP_EN  
COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A  
XIMB_SOUT_EN  
VCC_STDBY  
RESERVED  
SIN_TTL_COM2  
SIN_TTL_XIMB  
SOUT_TTL_COM2  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
RESERVED  
GND  
SECURE_MODE_BMC  
HARD_RESET  
FP_NMI_SWT_L  
RESERVED  
GND  
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L  
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L  
PWR_GOOD  
PS_PWR_ON  
GND  
DCD_TTL_FP  
DSR_TTL_FP  
CTS_TTL_FP  
RI_TTL_FP  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A  
I2C_FPC_SCL  
I2C_FPC_SDA  
GND  
GND  
VCC_STDBY  
RTS_TTL_FP  
DTR_TTL_FP  
GND  
RESERVED  
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
GND  
(key position)  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Legacy Connector  
The legacy connector on the PHP I/O baseboard provides the signals for the external legacy VGA,  
serial, parallel, mouse, and keyboard peripheral ports.  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
VCC_STDBY  
KB_DATA  
KB_CLK  
+5V  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
PP_STB_L  
PP_SLIN_L  
PP_INIT_L  
PP_ERR_L  
PP_AFD_L  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
DSR_TTL_FP  
CTS_TTL_FP  
RT_TTL_FP  
COM2_TO_STD_EN  
COM2_TO_FP_EN  
GND  
+5V  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
SP0_RTS_L  
GND  
A2  
B2  
MS_DATA  
MS_CLK  
A3  
B3  
SP1_RTS_L  
SP0_CTS_L  
SP1_CTS_L  
RTL_TTL_FP_L  
DTR_TTL_FP_L  
DCD_TTL_FP_L  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
XIMB_SOUT_EN  
SOUT_TTL_COM2  
PWR_GOOD  
GND  
A4  
B4  
SIN_TTL_XIMB  
SIN_TTL_COM2  
SP0_DCD_L  
SP1_DCD_L  
SP0_SIN  
A5  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
PP_SLCT  
PP_PE  
B5  
A6  
B6  
A7  
B7  
A8  
PP_BUSY  
PP_ACK_L  
GND  
B8  
A9  
B9  
GND  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
SP1_SIN  
PP_DR7  
PP_DR6  
PP_DR5  
PP_DR4  
GND  
SP0_RI_L  
SP1_RI_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
SP0_DTR_L  
SP1_DTR_L  
SP0_SOUT  
SP1_SOUT  
No connection  
SP0_DSR_L  
GND  
V_BLUE  
V_VSYNC  
PP_DR3  
PP_DR2  
PP_DR1  
PP_DR0  
GND  
GND  
V_GREEN  
GND  
V_HSYNC  
GND  
V_RED  
VR_DDCDAT  
A20 GND  
A40 GND  
B20 SP1_DSR_L  
B40 VR_DDCCLK  
USB Port  
OM06248  
Pin  
A1  
A2  
A3  
A4  
B1  
B2  
B3  
B4  
Signal  
VCC  
Description  
Overcurrent monitor line port 0  
Differential data line paired with DATAH0  
Differential data line paired with DATAL0  
Ground potential  
DATAL0  
DATAH0  
GND  
VCC  
Overcurrent monitor line port 1  
Differential data line paired with DATAH1  
Differential data line paired with DATAL1  
Ground potential  
DATAL1  
DATAH1  
GND  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Keyboard and Mouse Ports  
These identical PS/2 compatible ports share a common housing. The top one is the mouse, and the  
bottom one is the keyboard.  
6
5
4
3
2
1
OM00951A  
Mouse  
Signal  
Keyboard  
Signal  
Pin  
1
Pin  
1
MSEDAT (mouse data)  
No connection  
KEYDAT (keyboard data)  
No connection  
2
2
3
GND (Ground)  
3
GND (Ground)  
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)  
MSECLK (mouse clock)  
No connection  
4
FUSED_VCC (+5 V)  
KEYCLK (keyboard clock)  
No connection  
5
5
6
6
Serial Ports  
These ports support external devices such as modems and scanners that require serial data  
transmission.  
1
5
6
9
OM00932A  
Pin  
1
Signal  
DCD (data carrier detect)  
RXD (receive data)  
TXD (transmit data)  
DTR (data terminal ready)  
GND (Ground)  
2
3
4
5
6
DSR (data set ready)  
RTS (request to send)  
CTS (clear to send)  
RIA (ring indicator)  
7
8
9
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Parallel Port  
The IEEE 1284-compatible parallel port—used primarily for a printer—sends data in parallel  
format.  
13  
1
25  
14  
OM00933A  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Pin  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
Signal  
STROBE_L  
Data bit 0  
AUFDXT_L (auto feed)  
2
ERROR_L  
3
Data bit 1  
INIT_L (initialize printer)  
4
Data bit 2  
SLCTIN_L (select input)  
5
Data bit 3  
GND (Ground)  
GND  
6
Data bit 4  
7
Data bit 5  
GND  
8
Data bit 6  
GND  
9
Data bit 7  
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
ACK_L (acknowledge)  
BUSY  
GND  
GND  
PE (paper end)  
SLCT (select)  
GND  
ICMB Connectors  
The ICMB device provides external access to the ICMB devices that are within the chassis. This  
makes it possible to externally access chassis management functions, alert logs, post-mortem data,  
etc. The device also provides a mechanism for chassis power control. The server provides two  
SEMCONN 6-pin connectors to allow daisy-chained cabling.  
OM06193A  
Pin  
1
Signal  
No connection  
No connection  
+ (positive)  
2
3
4
- (negative)  
No connection  
No connection  
5
6
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 17 PHP I/O Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
VGA Video Port  
5
1
10  
6
15  
11  
OM00936A  
Pin  
1
Signal  
Red (analog color signal R)  
Green (analog color signal G)  
Blue (analog color signal B)  
No connection  
2
3
4
5
GND (video ground, shield)  
GND (video ground, shield)  
No connection  
6–8  
9
10  
GND (video ground)  
No connection  
11–12  
13  
HSYNC (horizontal sync)  
VSYNC (vertical sync)  
No connection  
14  
15  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting  
Configuration Jumpers  
This chapter describes the CPU baseboard and tells how to use the jumpers.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
CPU Baseboard Features  
The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I/O baseboard and memory modules through the  
midplane. The CPU baseboard provides  
•
•
four Slot 2 type connectors for processors packaged in Single Edge Contact (S.E.C.) cartridges  
an onboard DC-to-DC converter that supplies VTTvoltage for the CPU baseboard and memory  
modules  
•
•
•
four sockets for VRM8.3 converters that supply core voltage for the processors  
two sockets for VRM8.3 converters that supply L2 cache voltage for the processors  
I2C, serial peripheral interface (SPI), and in-system programming (ISP) server management  
interfaces  
In a symmetric multiprocessor (SMP) environment, all processors are equal and have no  
preassigned tasks. Distributing the processing loads among processors increases server  
performance. This is particularly useful when application demand is low and the I/O request load  
is high. In an SMP environment, the processors share a common bus, the same interrupt structure,  
and access to common memory and I/O channels. The SMP implementation conforms to the  
Multiprocessor Specification Version 1.4.  
The onboard PCI and memory controller (PMC) supports from 128 MB to 8 GB of ECC memory,  
either fast page mode (FPM) or extended data out (EDO) 3.3 V 50 or 60 ns DRAMs, mounted on  
JEDEC DIMMs.  
Processors  
The processor core and L2 cache components are mounted inside the S.E.C. cartridge. It plugs  
into one of the four Slot 2 connectors on the CPU baseboard.  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Memory Interface  
The memory subsystem consists of two memory modules installed in the two memory connectors  
on the midplane. The memory modules interface with the CPU baseboard through the midplane via  
the grand connector. The grand connector provides connectivity between the CPU baseboard, the  
PHP I/O baseboard, and memory modules through two 270-pin connectors and one 240-pin  
connector.  
Each memory module contains sixteen 72-bit wide DIMM sockets that can provide up to 4 GB of  
EDO memory per module. The memory bus uses gunning transceiver logic (AGTL)+ signaling  
technology. Because the bus must be terminated on each end, both memory connectors must  
contain a memory module; however, only one memory module must be populated with memory.  
DC-to-DC Voltage Converters  
The plug-in VRM8.3 DC to DC converters, on the CPU baseboard, supply voltage for the  
processors and the L2 caches. All the converters convert off the +12 V supply rail.  
•
•
Four converters supply voltage for the four processor cores.  
Two converters supply voltage for the four processor L2 caches (two L2 caches share one  
converter).  
An onboard switching converter provides the 1.5 V AGTL+ termination voltage (VTT) required by  
the CPU baseboard, memory modules, and processors. A second onboard linear converter  
provides +2.5 V for the logic on the CPU baseboard (clock buffers and voltage shifters). Both  
converters use the +5 V supply rail as source voltage.  
DS1624 SEEPROM  
When the DS1624 on the CPU baseboard is accessed via the I2C bus, it provides a temperature  
reading of the ambient temperature of the CPU baseboard. The DS1624 also provides:  
•
•
•
•
•
time and date the CPU baseboard was manufactured  
name of the board manufacturer  
name and description of the board  
serial number of the board  
part number of the board  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
I/O Interface  
The CPU baseboard interfaces with the PHP I/O baseboard and memory modules through the  
grand connector on the midplane. The I/O interface portion of the grand connector provides the  
primary and secondary expander buses, server management signals, front panel signals, and legacy  
signals. The expander buses provide source-synchronous, high-speed bidirectional point-to-point  
links between the CPU baseboard and the PHP I/O baseboard. Each expander bus has enough  
bandwidth for two 32-bit, 33 MHz PCI buses or one 64-bit, 33 MHz PCI bus. The expander buses  
use AGTL+ signaling technology.  
Front Side Bus  
The front side bus (FSB) is an ECC protected 64-bit bus that uses GTL+ signaling technology; it  
runs at 100 MHz. The FSB requires termination modules in each unused Slot 2 connector. When  
installing processors, always install them in sequence by starting with processor connector 1, then  
connector 2, and so on—bottom connector to top connector. For example, in a dual processor  
server, connectors 1 and 2 contain processors while connectors 3 and 4 contain terminator  
modules.  
Front Side Bus Terminator Module  
The FSB terminator module provides:  
•
•
the necessary termination for the AGTL+ signals on the FSB  
correct handling of JTAG scan signals  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CPU Baseboard Configuration Jumpers  
The J31 jumper block  
•
•
•
controls the VRMs and server management outputs  
determines core to bus ratio  
provides parking spaces for unused jumpers  
2
4
6
8 10 12 14 16  
J31  
1
3
5
7
9 11 13 15  
A
B
OM07314  
Figure 18-1. J31 Jumper Block  
Table 18-1. J31 Jumpers for VRMs and Server Management  
Pins 1 and 2  
Pins 3 and 4  
Status  
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Disable VRMs  
Reserved  
Disable Server Management  
Default/Normal Operation  
Key: 0 = open; 1 = closed  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Installing jumpers across pins 5 and 6, 7 and 8, and 9 and 10 determines the processor core-to-FSB  
frequency ratios. The bus frequency is 100 MHz. The core frequencies are based on the 100 MHz  
bus frequency.  
Table 18-2. J31 Jumpers for Bus Ratios  
Pins 5 and 6  
Pins 7 and 8  
Pins 9 and 10  
Bus Ratio  
Reserved  
9:2  
Core Frequency (MHz)  
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
450  
350  
7:2  
Reserved  
5:1  
500  
400  
300  
4:1  
3:1  
Reserved  
Key: 0 = open; 1 = closed  
The jumper block provides three parking positions for storing the jumpers. They can be parked  
across pins 11 and 12, 13 and 14, and 15 and 16.  
Changing a Jumper Setting  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn off the server, and unplug the power cord.  
3. Remove the top and left side covers. See Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
4. From the tables above, determine which jumper you need to move. Then move it to the new  
location.  
5. Reinstall the top and right side covers.  
6. Plug in the power cord, turn on the server, and wait for POST to complete. See Chapter 3,  
“Power-on Self Test: Description/Running.”  
7. Run the SSU to reconfigure your server. See Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to  
Run.”  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
CPU Baseboard Layout  
A B  
C
D
E
F
O
N
M
L
G
K
J
I
H
OM07312  
Figure 18-2. CPU Baseboard Layout  
A. J31, Jumper block  
B. J3, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #2 (processor core power only)  
C. J1, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #1 (processor core power only)  
D. J2, VRM connector provides power for processor slots #1 and #2 (L2 cache power only)  
E. J5, VRM connector provides power for processor slots #3 and #4 (L2 cache power only)  
F. Memory interface connectors  
G. I/O connector  
H. Power connectors  
I. J4, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #3 (processor core power only)  
J. J6, VRM connector provides power for processor slot #4 (processor core power only)  
K. Processor slot #4  
L. Processor slot #3  
M. Processor slot #2  
N. Processor slot #1  
O. J32, Front panel connector  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
CPU Baseboard Connectors  
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20:Rows A, B, and C  
Signal  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
Pin  
C1  
MD_L(35)  
GND  
MD_L(34)  
GND  
A2  
MD_L(32)  
GND  
B2  
C2  
MD_L(30)  
GND  
A3  
B3  
DSTBN_L(1)  
GND  
C3  
A4  
MD_L(28)  
GND  
B4  
C4  
MD_L(26)  
GND  
A5  
B5  
DSTBP_L(1)  
GND  
C5  
A6  
MD_L(24)  
GND  
B6  
C6  
MD_L(22)  
GND  
A7  
B7  
MD_L(21)  
GND  
C7  
A8  
GND  
B8  
C8  
MUXCLK0[A,B]  
GND  
A9  
GND  
B9  
MD_L(17)  
GND  
C9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
GND  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C20  
C21  
C22  
C23  
C24  
C25  
C26  
C27  
C28  
C29  
C30  
C31  
C32  
MRESET_L  
GND  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
MD_L(16)  
GND  
MD_L(14)  
GND  
MD_L(13)  
GND  
MD_L(11)  
GND  
MD_L(9)  
GND  
DSTBP_L(0)  
GND  
MD_L(7)  
GND  
MD_L(5)  
GND  
DSTBN_L(0)  
GND  
MD_L(3)  
GND  
MD_L(2)  
GND  
MD_L(1)  
GND  
MD_L(0)  
GND  
MEM[A,B]_ TCK  
GND  
MEMA_TDI  
GND  
MEM[A,B]_ TRST_L  
GND  
MA_(12)  
GND  
MA_L(11)  
GND  
MA_L(9)  
GND  
MA_L(7)  
GND  
MA_L(6)  
GND  
MA_L(4)  
GND  
MA_L(3)  
GND  
MA_L(2)  
GND  
MA_L(1)  
GND  
MA_L(0)  
GND  
CSTB_L  
GND  
CMND1_L  
GND  
BANK1_L  
GND  
BANK2_L  
GND  
CARD[0,1]_L  
continued  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows A, B, & C (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
PHIT[A,B]_L  
GND  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
A48  
A49  
A50  
A51  
A52  
A53  
A54  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
B48  
B49  
B50  
B51  
B52  
B53  
B54  
RCMPLT [A,B]_L  
GND  
C33  
C34  
C35  
C36  
C37  
C38  
C39  
C40  
C41  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C45  
C46  
C47  
C48  
C49  
C50  
C51  
C52  
C53  
C54  
RHIT[A,B]_L  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
MD_L(71)  
GND  
MD_L(69)  
GND  
MD_L(68)  
GND  
MD_L(66)  
GND  
MD_L(64)  
GND  
DSTBN_L(3)  
GND  
MD_L(62)  
GND  
MD_L(60)  
GND  
DSTBP_L(3)  
GND  
GND  
MUXCLK1 [A,B]  
GND  
GND  
MD_L(56)  
GND  
GND  
MD_L(54)  
GND  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
MD_L(53)  
GND  
MD_L(52)  
GND  
MD_L(50)  
GND  
MD_L(48)  
GND  
DSTBP_L(2)  
GND  
MD_L(46)  
GND  
MD_L(44)  
GND  
DSTBN_L(2)  
GND  
MD_L(42)  
GND  
MD_L(40)  
GND  
MD_L(39)  
GND  
MD_L(37)  
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows D & E  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
GND  
MD_L(31)  
GND  
MD_L(27)  
GND  
MD_L(23)  
GND  
MD_L(19)  
GND  
Reserved  
GND  
MD_L(15)  
GND  
MD_L(10)  
GND  
D1  
D2  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
D8  
MD_L(33)  
+1.5V  
MD_L(29)  
GND  
MD_L(25)  
+1.5V  
MD_L(20)  
GND  
MD_L(18)  
GND  
Reserved  
+1.5V  
MD_L(12)  
GND  
MD_L(8)  
+1.5V  
E1  
E2  
E3  
E4  
E5  
E6  
E7  
E8  
D9  
E9  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
E10  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
E16  
MD_L(6)  
continued  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Memory Connectors, J23 and J20: Rows D & E (continued)  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
D17  
D18  
D19  
D20  
D21  
D22  
D23  
D24  
D25  
D26  
D27  
D28  
D29  
D30  
D31  
D32  
D33  
D34  
D35  
D36  
D37  
D38  
D39  
D40  
D41  
D42  
D43  
D44  
D45  
D46  
D47  
D48  
D49  
D50  
D51  
D52  
D53  
D54  
MD_L(4)  
GND  
E17  
E18  
E19  
E20  
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
E54  
GND  
GND  
RCGCLK1 [A,B]  
GND  
GND  
GND  
MEM[A,B]_TMS  
MA_L(13)  
MA_L(10)  
+1.5V  
GND  
GND  
MA_L(8)  
GND  
MA_L(5)  
GND  
GND  
GND  
RCGCLK0-[A,B]  
GND  
GND  
GND  
ROW_L  
+1.5V  
BANK0_L  
GND  
CMND0_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
SDRAM [A,B]_CLK  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Reserved  
Reserved  
MD_L(67)  
+1.5V  
MD_L(70)  
GND  
MD_L(65)  
GND  
MD_L(63)  
GND  
MD_L(61)  
GND  
MD_L(59)  
GND  
MD_L(58)  
GND  
MD_L(57)  
GND  
MD_L(55)  
GND  
Reserved  
+1.5V  
Reserved  
GND  
MD_L(51)  
GND  
MD_L(49)  
GND  
MD_L(47)  
+1.5V  
MD_L(45)  
GND  
MD_L(43)  
GND  
MD_L(41)  
GND  
MD_L(38)  
+1.5V  
MD_L(36)  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
I/O Connector  
I/O Connector, J22: Rows A, B, & C  
Signal  
Pin  
A1  
Signal  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
Pin  
C1  
X1CLK  
5V_RET_ SENSE  
GND  
GND  
GND  
A2  
B2  
5V_SENSE  
GND  
C2  
X1D_L(15)  
X1D_L(14)  
X1D_L(12)  
GND  
A3  
X1D_L(13)  
GND  
B3  
C3  
A4  
B4  
X1XSTBN_L  
X1BE_L(1)  
X1D_L(11)  
X1ADS_L  
GND  
C4  
A5  
X1D_L(10)  
GND  
B5  
C5  
A6  
B6  
C6  
X1D_L(9)  
X1D_L(8)  
X1D_L(6)  
GND  
A7  
X1D_L(7)  
GND  
B7  
C7  
A8  
B8  
C8  
A9  
X1D_L(5)  
GND  
B9  
X1PAR_L  
GND  
C9  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C20  
C21  
C22  
C23  
C24  
C25  
C26  
C27  
C28  
C29  
C30  
C31  
C32  
C33  
C34  
C35  
C36  
X1D_L(4)  
X1D_L(3)  
X1D_L(1)  
X1D_L(0)  
GND  
X1D_L(2)  
GND  
X1BE_L(0)  
GND  
X1XRTS_L  
GND  
X1HRTS_L  
GND  
DS2P_I2C_SDA  
GND  
DS2P_I2C_ SCL  
GND  
I2C_FPC_SDA  
I2C_FPC_SCL  
VCC_ STDBY  
ISP_SDI  
INTRUSION_L  
ISP_SDO  
RI_TTL_ FP  
CTS_TTL_FP  
GND  
VCC_ STDBY  
GND  
HARD_ RESET  
GND  
FAN_ FAILED_L  
GND  
SPEAKER_ DATA  
DTR_TTL_FP  
GND  
RTS_TTL_FP  
GND  
ISP_FPC_ SDO  
GND  
ISP_CONNECTOR_SCLK B23  
GND  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
RESERVED  
GND  
X0CLK  
DSR_TTL_FP  
GND  
GND  
ISP_HSBP_ SDO  
GND  
X0D_L(15)  
X0D_L(14)  
X0D_L(12)  
GND  
X0D_L(13)  
GND  
X0XSTBN_L  
X0BE_L(1)  
X0D_L(11)  
X0ADS_L  
GND  
X0D_L(10)  
GND  
X0D_L(9)  
X0D_L(8)  
X0D_L(6)  
GND  
X0D_L(7)  
GND  
X0D_L(5)  
GND  
X0PAR_L  
GND  
X0D_L(4)  
X0D_L(3)  
X0D_L(2)  
GND  
X0BE_L(0)  
GND  
continued  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
I/O Connector, J22: Rows A, B, & C (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
X0D_L(1)  
A37  
A38  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
A48  
X0XRTS_L  
GND  
B37  
B38  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
B48  
X0HRTS_L  
GND  
C37  
C38  
C39  
C40  
C41  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C45  
C46  
C47  
C48  
X0D_L(0)  
GND  
IGNNE_L  
GND  
I2C_GLOBAL_SDA  
SMI_L  
NMI_5V  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
BMC_SPI_BUS(0)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(6)  
BMC_SPI_BUS(1)  
IO_TDO  
BMC_SPI_BUS(3)  
GND  
BMC_SPI_BUS(5)  
GND  
CPU_CPI_RESET_L  
GND  
PROC_ RESET_L  
A20M_L  
IO_TDI  
PWRGDB  
IO_TMS  
GND  
IO_TCK  
XIMB_ SOUT_ENT  
GND  
SIN_TTL_ COM2  
GND  
COM2_TO_FP_EN  
I/O Connector, J22: Rows D & E  
Signal  
Pin  
D1  
Signal  
Pin  
X1HSTBN_L  
X1HSTBP_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
E1  
D2  
E2  
D3  
E3  
X1XSTBP_L  
GND  
D4  
RESERVED  
E4  
D5  
GND  
E5  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
GND  
D6  
MIOC_INTREQ_L  
E6  
D7  
GND  
E7  
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
GND  
D8  
X1RST_L  
E8  
D9  
GND  
E9  
I2C_CEL_ CONNECT  
GND  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
D15  
D16  
D17  
D18  
D19  
D20  
D21  
D22  
X1BLK_L  
E10  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
E15  
E16  
E17  
E18  
E19  
E20  
E21  
E22  
GND  
PWR_CNTRL_RTC  
GND  
I2C_CEL_ CONNECT_FPC  
GND  
FP_NMI_SWT_L  
PS_PWR_ON  
X1IB_L  
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L  
GND  
PWR_GOOD  
RESERVED  
FP_TO_PIIX4_PWR  
GND  
GND  
SECURE_MODE_BMC  
GND  
ISP_EN2_L  
-12V  
CPU_SLP_L  
GND  
ISP_FPC_EN_L  
-12V  
continued  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
I/OConnector, J22: Rows D & E (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
ISP_SCLK  
ISP_MODE  
X0HSTBN_L  
X0HSTBP_L  
GND  
D23  
D24  
D25  
D26  
D27  
D28  
D29  
D30  
D31  
D32  
D33  
D34  
D35  
D36  
D37  
D38  
D39  
D40  
D41  
D42  
D43  
D44  
D45  
D46  
D47  
D48  
GND  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
ISP_EN_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
X0XSTBP_L  
GND  
DCD_TTL_FP  
GND  
SOUT_TTL_ COM2  
GND  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
GND  
SIN_TTL_ XIMB  
GND  
X0RST_L  
GND  
RESERVED  
GND  
X0BLK_L  
GND  
RESET_HSBP_L  
GND  
FERR_L  
GND  
I2C_GLOBAL_SCL  
IO_PWRGD  
X0IB_L  
INTR  
RESERVED  
RESERVED  
GND  
GND  
BMC_SPI_ BUS(2)  
GND  
BMC_SPI_BUS(4)  
GND  
INIT_L  
RESET_PWR_ DIST_L  
GND  
PICD(0)  
IO_TRST_L  
STPCLK_L  
COM2_TO_ SIO_EN  
PICD(1)  
GND  
PIC_CLK  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Power Connectors  
Power Connectors, J21B, J21C, J12D, J24B, J24C, and J24D  
J21B  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
J21C  
Pin  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
J21D  
Pin  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
J24B  
Pin  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Pin  
Signal  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
+3.3V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Power Connectors, J21B, J21C, J12D, J24B, J24C, and J24D (continued)  
J24C  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
J24D  
Pin  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
Signal  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
+12V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
Pin  
Signal  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
+5V  
P1A1  
P1A2  
P1A3  
P2A1  
P2A2  
P2A3  
P1B1  
P1B2  
P1B3  
P2B1  
P2B2  
P2B3  
P1C1  
P1C2  
P1C3  
P2C1  
P2C2  
P2C3  
P1D1  
P1D2  
P1D3  
P2D1  
P2D2  
P2D3  
P1E1  
P1E2  
P1E3  
P2E1  
P2E2  
P2E3  
Front Panel Connector  
Front Panel Connector, J32  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
GND  
1
+12V  
2
-12V  
+12V  
3
+12V  
GND  
GND  
4
GND  
5
GND  
+12V  
6
+12V  
+12V  
GND  
+12V  
7
SPEAKER_DATA  
ISP_SCLK  
FAN_FAILED_L  
GND  
8
9
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
+5V  
ISP_SDI  
+5V  
ISP_FPC_EN_L  
FP_TO_PIIX_PWRBTN  
ISP_FPC_SDO  
Reserved  
ISP_MODE  
+5V  
Reserved  
+5V  
COM2_TO_FP_EN  
COM2_TO_SIO_EN_A  
GND  
PROC_RESET_L  
Reserved  
SECURE_MODE_BMC  
XIMB_SOUT_EN  
continued  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 18 CPU Baseboard: Description/Setting Configuration Jumpers  
Front Panel Connector, J32 (continued)  
Signal  
Pin  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
Signal  
Pin  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
77  
78  
79  
80  
HARD_RESET  
FP_NMI_SWT_L  
SIN_TTL_COM2  
SIN_TTL_XIMB  
GND  
GND  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
GND  
SOUT_TTL_XIMB  
PWR_CNTRL_RTC_L  
GND  
PWR_CNTRL_SFC_L  
SOUT_TTL_COM2  
GND  
PS_PWR_ON  
DSR_TTL_FP  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_FPC  
CTS_TTL_FP  
I2C_CEL_CONNECT_BMC_A  
I2C_FPC_SCL  
I2C_FPC_SDA  
GND  
PWR_GOOD  
DCD_TTL_FP  
GND  
Reserved  
Reserved  
RI_TTL_FP  
Reserved  
RTS_TTL_FP  
DTR_TTL_FP  
I2C_BACKUP_SCL  
VCC_STDBY  
VCC_STDBY  
GND  
GND  
I2C_BACKUP_SDA  
VCC_STDBY  
VCC_STDBY  
Reserved  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding  
Memory  
This chapter describes the memory module and tells how to populate the DIMM sockets on the  
memory module.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Module Features  
Memory module:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Up to 4 GB of ECC memory using sixteen 72-bit dual inline memory modules (DIMMs)  
60 ns and 50 ns, 3.3 V, buffered EDO DRAM  
Four-way interleaving  
A minimum configuration of 128 MB using four 32 MB DIMMs  
Supports buffered DIMMs with capacities of 32, 64, and 256 MB  
Provides server management data with an onboard EEPROM, including thermal monitoring,  
FRU information, and presence-detect bit access  
•
Can act as a memory terminator module when not populated with DIMMs  
You must install two high-capacity DRAM memory modules and one of them must be populated  
with DIMMs.  
ECC memory detects and corrects single-bit errors from DRAM in real time, allowing your server  
to function normally despite data transmission errors. ECC detects all double-bit errors but does  
not correct them; it also detects, but does not correct, three-bit and four-bit adjacent errors in a  
DRAM nibble. Single-bit errors are reported down to the exact bit within DIMM. Multiple-bit  
errors are reported down to an interleave which corresponds to a single DIMM.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
EDO DRAM Array  
The extended data out (EDO) DRAM array on the memory module consists of sixteen 72-bit  
(64-bit data plus 8 ECC bits) DIMM sockets. They are divided into four memory banks, A–D, of  
four sockets each. These banks support only 4:1 interleaving (DIMMs in all four sockets). For  
example, in bank A socket  
•
•
•
•
J1 contains interleave 0  
J2 contains interleave 1  
J3 contains interleave 2  
J4 contains interleave 3  
Because each interleave provides access to 72 bits of data, 4:1 interleaving yields 288 bits  
(32 bytes) per DRAM transaction—one cache line for the processor. If the CPU baseboard  
contains two 4:1 interleaving memory modules, successive DRAM transactions occurring in the  
different memory modules complete at a maximum rate of one transaction every 30 ns. This yields  
a maximum data rate of 1.067 GB per second.  
Although several DIMM population options are available, the following table lists the populations  
that should be used to add memory to the system.  
Table 19-1. Memory Module DIMM Support  
Category  
Supported DIMM Variety  
Speed  
50 ns, 60 ns  
Capacity/Organization/Refresh  
32 MB: 16 Mbit, 4Mx4 DRAM; 2 K or 4 K refresh*  
64 MB: 64 Mbit, 8Mx8 DRAM; 4 K refresh*  
256 MB: Double-high; 64 Mbit, 16Mx4 DRAM; 4K or 8K refresh*  
Voltage  
3.3 V  
Data Width  
x72 (ECC)  
EDO  
Page Mode  
Buffered/Non  
Maximum Height  
DRAM Package  
Buffered  
2.4 inches  
TSSOP  
* The memory module supports only CAS-before-RAS refresh. When selecting a module, make sure that the target  
refresh number corresponds to CBR refresh.  
All DIMMs within a given bank must be identical. From bank to bank, the 450NX PCI chipset  
supports different varieties of DIMM sizes, manufacturers, and speeds.  
Only configuration adhering to the following rules are validated, and they are the only  
configuration that are fully supported:  
•
•
•
All DIMMs within a given back must be identical.  
Install 32, 64, and 256 MB DIMMs in the memory banks.  
The total number of DIMMs on both memory modules: 4, 8, 16, 24, or 32 (two memory  
module configuration).  
•
The total number of DIMMs using only one memory module must be: 4, 8, 12, or 16 (one  
memory module and one memory terminator configuration).  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
•
Install an equal number of DIMMs on each memory module, in the two memory module  
configuration, except when only four DIMMs are used. In that case, all four DIMMs are on  
the primary memory module installed in primary connector on the midplane.  
All DIMMs on a memory module are identical in size and speed.  
DIMMs may differ in size and speed between memory modules. However, the maximum data  
transfer rate can only be provided when the banks of each module are configured identically  
(through module-to-module interleaving as indicated in the rules below).  
•
•
To take advantage of address bit permuting (ABP), which increases memory access performance  
across sequential cache line accesses, the following rules must be followed:  
•
•
•
All banks that are used must be populated with four DIMMs.  
There must be a power of two banks populated (2, 4, 8, or 16).  
All banks in an ABP group (two banks in 2-bank permuting or four banks in 4-bank  
permuting) must be the same size.  
•
•
All populated banks must be adjacent and start at bank 0.  
When it is required that both memory modules be in the server, both must be configured to  
allow equivalent ABP settings. For example, the chip set cannot support 2-bank permuting on  
one module and 4-bank permuting on the other.  
To take advantage of module-to-module interleaving, which provides maximum performance  
across sequential cache line accesses, the following rules must be followed:  
•
•
All ABP rules above must be followed.  
Two memory modules must used, and corresponding banks must be identically populated with  
DIMMs of the same size and type.  
Before allowing the processors to come out of reset, server management firmware scans the  
presence-detect bits of all DIMMs installed on the memory modules. If they are 50-ns DIMMs,  
then server management changes the value of the chipset’s DRAM speed-mode bit. The default  
value on this bit is a high voltage level, which corresponds to 60-ns timings; changing the value to  
a low voltage level places this bit in the 50-ns mode. Changing the value of the bit can only be  
effected by software, and it must be before the processors come out of reset. If the bit changes  
while a memory access is in process, the results are unpredictable. After deciding the value of the  
bit and making any necessary changes, server management may proceed with processor reset.  
While changing this bit will not increase the theoretical maximum bandwidth, it will decrease  
initial latency of DRAM reads by one clock and increase bandwidth of consecutive page misses.  
When installing less than 16 DIMMs on a memory module, there is a preferred order for  
populating the DIMM sockets to maintain optimal signal integrity. When installing two memory  
modules on the CPU baseboard, you should always alternate DIMM installation between memory  
modules. For instance, when installing 16 DIMMs in the system, the quantities should be divided  
such that eight fill the first two banks of one module and eight more fill the same two banks in the  
second module. See the DIMM interleave configurations in Figures 19-1 through 19-3.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
J1  
J2  
A
J5  
J6  
B
C
D
J9  
J10  
J13  
J14  
J3  
J4  
A
J7  
J8  
B
C
D
J11  
J12  
J15  
J16  
OM07332  
Figure 19-1. 4:1 Interleave With Four DIMMs  
A. Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)  
B. Bank B, J5-J8 (empty)  
C. Bank C, J9-J12 (empty)  
D. Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
J1  
J2  
J5  
J6  
A
B
J9  
C
D
J10  
J13  
J14  
J3  
J4  
J7  
J8  
A
B
J11  
J12  
J15  
J16  
C
D
OM07340  
Figure 19-2. 4:1 Interleave With Eight DIMMs  
A. Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)  
B. Bank B, J5-J8 (populated)  
C. Bank C, J9-J12 (empty)  
D. Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
J1  
J2  
J5  
J6  
J9  
J10  
A
B
C
J13  
J14  
D
J3  
J4  
J7  
J8  
J11  
J12  
A
B
C
J15  
J16  
D
OM07341  
Figure 19-3. 4:1 Interleave With 12 DIMMs  
A. Bank A, J1-J4 (populated)  
B. Bank B, J5-J8 (populated)  
C. Bank C, J9-J12 (populated)  
D. Bank D, J13-J16 (empty)  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
Memory Module Layout  
J1  
J2  
J5  
J6  
G
A
B
C
D
J9  
J10  
J13  
J14  
J3  
J4  
J7  
J8  
J11  
J12  
J15  
A
B
C
D
G
J16  
OM07307  
E
F
Figure 19-4. Memory Module Layout  
A. J1-J4, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank A  
B. J5-J8, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank B  
C. J9-J12, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank C  
D. J13-J16, 168-pin DIMM sockets, Bank D  
E. U6E2, DS1624, I2C EEPROM and temperature sensor (package)  
F. J21 memory interface connector  
G. Eject/insert levers  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Installing DIMMs  
CAUTION  
DIMM devices with gold contacts should not be installed in DIMM sockets  
with tin-lead contacts or vice versa. Mixing dissimilar metal contacts types  
has been shown to result in unreliable memory operation.  
To avoid potential memory problems, use only DIMMs from JEDEC-compatible manufacturers  
that have been tested for compatibility with the memory module. Contact your sales representative  
or dealer for a list of approved DIMMs.  
See Figures 19-5 and 19-6.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13, "Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling."  
4. Being careful not to touch the components on the memory module, place the module  
DIMM-side up on a nonconductive, static-free surface.  
5. Hold the DIMM only by the edges as you remove the DIMM from the antistatic package.  
6. Beginning with bank A (Figure 19-5), socket J1, orient the DIMM so that the two notches in  
the bottom edge align with the keyed socket.  
OM07320  
Figure 19-5. DIMM Orientation  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
CAUTION  
Use extreme care when installing a DIMM. Applying too much pressure can  
damage the socket slot. DIMMs are keyed such that they can be inserted in  
only one way.  
7. Insert the bottom edge of the DIMM into socket J1, and press down firmly on the DIMM until  
it seats correctly (Figure 19-6).  
OM06767  
Figure 19-6. Properly Seated DIMM  
8. Repeat the above steps to install more DIMMs. Always install them in sequence by installing  
the next DIMM in bank A, socket J2 and so on, with the last one in bank D, socket J16.  
9. Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13.  
10. Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.  
11. Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server.  
12. Turn on your monitor and then your server.  
13. Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory. Failure to do so  
may degrade the performance of your server. For information about running the SSU, see  
Chapter 5, "System Setup Utility: When to Run."  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Removing DIMMs  
See Figure 19-7.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Remove the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the memory module as described in Chapter 13, "Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling."  
4. Starting with the first DIMM-filled socket closest to the top edge of the module, remove the  
DIMMs one at a time.  
CAUTION  
Use extreme care when removing a DIMM. Too much pressure can damage  
the socket slot. Apply only enough pressure on the plastic ejector levers to  
release the DIMM.  
5. Gently push the plastic ejector levers out and down to eject the DIMM from the socket  
(Figure 19-7).  
6. Carefully lift the DIMM away from the socket, and store it in an antistatic package.  
7. Repeat the above steps to remove other DIMMs.  
OM06768  
Figure 19-7. Removing DIMMs  
8. Reinstall the memory module as described in Chapter 13.  
9. Reinstall the top and side covers as described in Chapter 12.  
10. Reconnect all external cables and the power cords to the server.  
11. Turn on your monitor and then your server.  
12. Run the SSU to configure the server and to properly attribute ECC memory. Failure to do so  
may degrade the performance of your server. For information about running the SSU, see  
Chapter 5, "System Setup Utility: When to Run."  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
System Management Interface  
The devices on I2C bus of the memory module provide system management software with module  
operating temperature, DIMM configuration, and field replacement unit (FRU) data. The devices  
also provide  
•
•
•
•
•
time and date the module was manufactured  
name of the module manufacturer  
name and description of the module  
serial number of the module  
part number of the module  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Memory Module Connector  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
MD36_L  
VCC  
Pin  
B1  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
C1  
GND  
A1  
GDCMPLT_L  
GND  
A2  
B2  
DSTBN2_L  
GND  
C2  
A3  
MD39_L  
VCC  
B3  
C3  
MD41_L  
GND  
A4  
B4  
DSTBP2_L  
GND  
C4  
A5  
MD43_L  
VCC  
B5  
C5  
MD45_L  
GND  
A6  
B6  
MD46_L  
GND  
C6  
A7  
MD48_L  
VCC  
B7  
C7  
MD50_L  
GND  
A8  
B8  
MD51_L  
GND  
C8  
A9  
MD53_L  
VCC  
B9  
C9  
VTT  
A10  
A11  
A12  
A13  
A14  
A15  
A16  
A17  
A18  
A19  
A20  
A21  
A22  
A23  
A24  
A25  
A26  
A27  
A28  
A29  
A30  
A31  
A32  
A33  
A34  
A35  
A36  
A37  
A38  
B10  
B11  
B12  
B13  
B14  
B15  
B16  
B17  
B18  
B19  
B20  
B21  
B22  
B23  
B24  
B25  
B26  
B27  
B28  
B29  
B30  
B31  
B32  
B33  
B34  
B35  
B36  
B37  
B38  
MD54_L  
VTT  
C10  
C11  
C12  
C13  
C14  
C15  
C16  
C17  
C18  
C19  
C20  
C21  
C22  
C23  
C24  
C25  
C26  
C27  
C28  
C29  
C30  
C31  
C32  
C33  
C34  
C35  
C36  
C37  
C38  
GND  
GND  
MUXCLK1  
GND  
GND  
MD56_L  
VTT  
GND  
MD59_L  
GND  
VCC  
DSTBP3_L  
GND  
MD61_L  
VCC  
MD63_L  
GND  
DSTBN3_L  
GND  
MD65_L  
VCC  
VTT  
MD67_L  
GND  
GND  
MD69_L  
VCC  
MD71_L  
GND  
VTT  
NC  
GND  
VTT  
VCC  
CARD_NUM  
VTT  
GND  
GND  
SPAREKCLK1  
GND  
GND  
PHIT_L  
VTT  
GND  
WDEVT_L  
GND  
VCC  
RCMPLT_L  
GND  
CMND0_L  
VCC  
DCMPLT_L  
GND  
BANK0_L  
GND  
BANK2_L  
VCC  
DVALID_L  
GND  
ROW_L  
VTT  
MA0_L  
GND  
DOFF0_L  
GND  
MA2_L  
VTT  
MA4_L  
VCC  
DOFF1_L  
GND  
MA6_L  
GND  
MA8_L  
VCC  
DSEL_L  
GND  
MA10_L  
GND  
GND  
RCGCLK  
GND  
MA13_L  
continued  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
Memory Module Connector: A, B, & C (continued)  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
VTT  
Pin  
A39  
A40  
A41  
A42  
A43  
A44  
A45  
A46  
A47  
A48  
A49  
A50  
A51  
A52  
A53  
A54  
A55  
A56  
A57  
A58  
A59  
A60  
B39  
B40  
B41  
B42  
B43  
B44  
B45  
B46  
B47  
B48  
B49  
B50  
B51  
B52  
B53  
B54  
B55  
B56  
B57  
B58  
B59  
B60  
C39  
C40  
C41  
C42  
C43  
C44  
C45  
C46  
C47  
C48  
C49  
C50  
C51  
C52  
C53  
C54  
C55  
C56  
C57  
C58  
C59  
C60  
SPARECLK0  
GND  
GND  
NC  
GND  
VTT  
MD0_L  
GND  
VCC  
MD1_L  
GND  
MD3_L  
VCC  
MD5_L  
GND  
DSTBN0_L  
GND  
MD7_L  
VCC  
MD9_L  
GND  
DSTBP0_L  
GND  
MD11_L  
VCC  
MD13_L  
GND  
MD14_L  
GND  
TDI  
MD16_L  
GND  
VCC  
TRST_L  
VTT  
GND  
MUXCLK0  
GND  
GND  
MD18_L  
VTT  
GND  
MD21_L  
GND  
VCC  
MD22_L  
GND  
MD24_L  
VCC  
MD26_L  
GND  
DSTBP1_L  
GND  
MD28_L  
VCC  
GDCMPLT_L  
GND  
DSTBN1_L  
GND  
MD31_L  
VCC  
MD33_L  
MD34_L  
Memory Module Connector: D & E  
Signal  
MD37_L  
GND  
Pin  
D1  
Signal  
VCC  
Pin  
E1  
D2  
MD38_L  
VCC  
E2  
MD40_L  
GND  
D3  
E3  
D4  
MD42_L  
VCC  
E4  
MD44_L  
GND  
D5  
E5  
D6  
MD47_L  
VCC  
E6  
MD49_L  
GND  
D7  
E7  
D8  
MD52_L  
VCC  
E8  
TDO  
D9  
E9  
GND  
D10  
D11  
D12  
D13  
D14  
VCC  
E10  
E11  
E12  
E13  
E14  
MD55_L  
GND  
VCC  
MD57_L  
VCC  
MD58_L  
GND  
MD60_L  
continued  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Memory Module Connector: D & E (continued)  
Signal  
MD62_L  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
VCC  
Pin  
D15  
D16  
D17  
D18  
D19  
D20  
D21  
D22  
D23  
D24  
D25  
D26  
D27  
D28  
D29  
D30  
D31  
D32  
D33  
D34  
D35  
D36  
D37  
D38  
D39  
D40  
D41  
D42  
D43  
D44  
D45  
D46  
D47  
D48  
D49  
D50  
D51  
D52  
D53  
E15  
E16  
E17  
E18  
E19  
E20  
E21  
E22  
E23  
E24  
E25  
E26  
E27  
E28  
E29  
E30  
E31  
E32  
E33  
E34  
E35  
E36  
E37  
E38  
E39  
E40  
E41  
E42  
E43  
E44  
E45  
E46  
E47  
E48  
E49  
E50  
E51  
E52  
E53  
MD64_L  
VCC  
MD66_L  
GND  
MD68_L  
VCC  
MD70_L  
GND  
VCC  
NC  
VCC  
GND  
I2C_BMC_SCL  
VCC  
PWRGD  
GND  
I2C_BMC_SDA  
VCC  
RHIT_L  
GND  
GRCMPLT_L  
VCC  
CARD_L  
GND  
BANK1_L  
VCC  
CMND1_L  
GND  
CSTB_L  
VCC  
MA1_L  
GND  
MA3_L  
VCC  
MA5_L  
GND  
MA7_L  
VCC  
MA9_L  
GND  
MA11_L  
VCC  
MA12_L  
GND  
VCC  
VCC  
VCC  
GND  
TCK  
VCC  
VCC  
GND  
MD2_L  
VCC  
MD4_L  
GND  
MD6_L  
VCC  
MD8_L  
GND  
MD10_L  
VCC  
MD12_L  
GND  
MD15_L  
VCC  
TMS  
GND  
MRESET_L  
VCC  
MD17_L  
GND  
MD19_L  
VCC  
MD20_L  
continued  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 19 Memory Modules: Description/Adding Memory  
Memory Module Connector: D & E (continued)  
Signal  
GND  
Pin  
Signal  
MD23_L  
VCC  
Pin  
D54  
D55  
D56  
D57  
D58  
D59  
D60  
E54  
E55  
E56  
E57  
E58  
E59  
E60  
MD25_L  
GND  
MD27_L  
VCC  
MD29_L  
GND  
MD30_L  
VCC  
MD32_L  
GND  
MD35_L  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20 Power System: Description/Calculating  
Power Usage  
This chapter describes the modular power system and explains how to calculate power usage for  
your server.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of  
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
AC Input Power  
The server can operate with input voltages of 200-240VAC or 100-120VAC. A jumper located on  
the midplane selects the input voltage at which the server will operate. The jumper also  
enables/disables the brown out recovery feature that aids server startup during low AC input  
voltage conditions.  
Valid AC Input  
JP1 Position  
Range  
AC Mains  
Brown Out Feature  
Installed  
200-240VAC or  
100-120VAC  
15A  
15A  
Disabled  
Disabled  
Removed  
200-240VAC  
15A  
Enabled  
Enabling the brown out feature ensures that all power supplies will turn on when the AC input  
voltage reaches at least 180VAC following an AC main brown out condition.  
Disabling the brown out feature can cause power problems when the system tries to recover from a  
brown out condition. The problems that can result depend on server AC input voltages.  
•
For 100-120VAC input power after a brown out: AC input voltage may slowly rise to its  
nominal level and because of slight differences in power supply turn on thresholds at 90V, one  
power supply may turn on before the others. This power supply will most likely see too large  
a DC load and shut down (other power supplies may do the same), removing all DC voltages  
from the server.  
•
•
For 200-240VAC input power after a brown out: AC input voltage may slowly rise to its  
nominal level and the power supplies turn on at 90V doubling the current load on the AC main  
and causing them to trip.  
For power supply input voltages see Table 20-3.  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Jumper JP1 Installing/Removing  
See Figure 20-1.  
1. Shut down the server and disconnect it from its power source.  
2. Remove the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
3. Remove the peripheral bay as described in Chapter 13, “Server Components:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”.  
4. Install or remove the jumper.  
5. Reinstall the peripheral bay.  
6. Reinstall the memory module cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers:  
Removing/Reinstalling.”  
7. Reconnect the server to power and start the server.  
OM07348  
Figure 20-1. Jumper JP1  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Power System  
The modular power system for the server is provided by up to three autoranging power supplies  
and a midplane. When connected to 100-120VAC mains each power supply is capable of  
delivering 650 watts DC. When connected to 200-240VAC mains each power supply is capable of  
delivering 750 watts DC. The power system may be configured with two power supplies (standard)  
or three power supplies (2 + 1, redundant). The power supplies are mounted in a 2 + 1 pattern in  
the back of the chassis along the bottom. Each power supply has an integrated fan for cooling.  
The midplane provides connectors for the hot-swap power supplies. The midplane is the DC  
power distribution hub providing connectors for the CPU baseboard, memory modules, I/O  
baseboard, and peripheral bay. The midplane also provides the interface logic for power supply  
related management functions.  
Operator accessible areas are mechanically shielded from energy hazards while hot-swapping—  
installing or removing—a hard disk drive, or a system fan. PCI hot-plug expansion boards are  
240VA protected by current limiting circuitry on the PHP I/O board.  
Care must be taken not to overload an AC mains circuit by plugging to many loads into a single  
AC circuit. It is recommended to either plugging the power cord of the server in a separate circuit  
or calculating the current drawn from loads attached to an AC circuit to make sure AC current  
limits will not been exceeded.  
If a power supply fails in the redundant power system, an LED marked “FAIL” at the back of the  
power supply illuminates yellow. If a power supply predictive failure event occurs in the redundant  
power system, an LED marked “PRFL” at the back of the power supply blinks yellow. In both  
cases, the yellow power supply failure LED on the front panel starts flashing. The supply can be  
hot-swapped—removed and replaced—without turning off the power or impacting server  
operations. If the load on a single power supply exceeds the output ratings defined in Table 20-2,  
an LED marked “FAIL” at the back of the power supply blinks yellow and the entire power system  
is shut down.  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Power Supply Input Voltages  
Table 20-1. Power Supply AC Input Ratings  
Parameter  
V in (115)  
Minimum  
Nominal  
100-120  
200-240  
50/60  
Maximum  
132  
Units  
V RMS  
V RMS  
Hz  
90  
V in (230)  
180  
47  
264  
V in Frequency  
63  
AC Input Current (at  
maximum load)  
13 A @115 VAC  
7 A @ 220 VAC  
Ampere  
Power Supply Output Voltages  
Table 20-2. Power Supply Output Ratings  
Power  
Two or Three1  
Supplies at  
100-120VAC  
Two or Three1  
Supplies at  
200-240VAC  
Supply  
Individual Supply at  
100-120VAC  
Individual Supply at  
220-240VAC  
Outputs  
3.3 V  
31 A  
31 A  
31 A  
1 A  
36 A  
36 A  
36 A  
1 A  
58 A  
68 A  
5 V  
58 A  
64 A  
12 V  
58 A  
68 A  
-12 V  
1 A  
1 A  
5 V Standby  
15 V  
1 A  
1 A  
1.75 A  
200 mA  
1.75 A  
200 mA  
200 mA  
200 mA  
1
Forced load sharing is for 5, 3.3, and 12 V only. Passive load sharing is used for 5V Standby, -12 and 15V.  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Server Current Usage  
Table 20-3 shows the current usage for both minimally and fully configured servers. You can  
easily calculate power usage in the server from the numbers provided. The table is for reference  
only. It is not meant to provide the exact current usage in the server.  
NOTE  
✏
The current usage will vary depending on the number of processors, the  
number of I/O card, the number of hard drives, and the size and number of  
DIMMs on the memory modules installed in your server.  
Table 20-3. Server Board Set Voltages and Currents  
+3.3 V  
+5 V  
+12 V  
+5 V Standby  
-12 V  
1
2
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
Max.  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
Current  
CPU baseboard with  
processors  
4.6 A  
4.6 A  
800 mA  
6.2 A  
0.2 A  
28.5 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
Front panel8  
0 A  
0 A  
50mA  
2.23A  
8.4 A  
3.1A  
4.0A  
100 mA  
100 mA  
1.0A  
1 mA  
1 mA  
10 mA  
10 mA  
Total (CPU  
baseboard)  
4.6 A  
4.6 A  
850 mA  
3.3 A  
32.5 A  
1.0 A  
Total DRAM (8 GB)  
2.4 A  
27.2 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
PHP I/O baseboard  
PCI/ISA3, 4, 5, 6, 7  
I/O riser card  
600 mA  
0 A  
5 A  
600 mA  
0 A  
4.25 A  
35.68 A  
70 mA  
40 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
20 mA  
5.0 A  
5 mA  
0 A  
500 mA  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
23 A  
0 A  
1.0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
0 A  
30 mA  
5.05 A  
5 mA  
10 mA  
150 mA  
650 mA  
Total (I/O  
600 mA  
A
28 A  
600 mA  
1.0 A  
baseboard)  
Total Current  
9.2 A  
59.8 A  
1.5 A  
7.5 W  
48.4 A  
242 W  
3.3 S  
37.6 A  
110 mA  
0.55 W  
1.7 A  
8.5 W  
1 mA  
1.0 A  
12 W  
(DRAM, CPU and  
I/O baseboards)  
Total Power  
304 W  
197.3 W  
39.6 W  
451.2 W  
0.01 W  
(DRAM, CPU and  
I/O baseboards)  
1
Minimum server configuration: one idle processor, two VRMs, three processor termination modules, two memory  
modules totaling 128 MB DRAM, no I/O adapter cards, front panel with system fans at low speed, I/O riser card, no  
keyboard, no mouse, no video, no parallel-port connections, and no bus activity.  
2
Maximum server configuration: four 65 W processors six VRMs operating at 80% efficiency, front panel with system  
fans at high speed, I/O riser card, keyboard, mouse, video, parallel port connected, two memory modules with 8 GB  
DRAM, and all I/O adapter slots filled. See notes 3-8. Maximized bus activity.  
3
4
5
6
7
8
Current must not exceed 7.58 A (25 W) per PCI slot or 23 A total for all PCI expansion slots on +3.3 V.  
Current must not exceed 5 A (25 W) per PCI slot or 35.68 A total for all expansion slots on +5 V.  
Current must not exceed 2 A per ISA slot or 35.68 A total for all expansion slots on +5 V.  
Current must not exceed 500 mA per PCI or ISA slot or 5 A total for all expansion slots on +12 V.  
Current must not exceed 100 mA per slot or 1.0 A total for all expansion slots on -12 V.  
These values are included for reference only. They are not included in the maximum configuration requirements.  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Calculating Power Usage  
Use the worksheets in Tables 20-4 and 20-5 to calculate the total DC power used by your server  
configuration.  
The documentation that comes with each add-in device should specify its current and voltage  
requirements.  
To calculate the total combined wattage for your server, do this:  
1. List the current for each board and device in the appropriate voltage level column in  
Table 20-4.  
2. Add the currents in each column of Table 20-4, and enter the total current for each column in  
Table 20-5.  
3. Multiply the voltage by the total current to get the total wattage for each voltage level.  
4. Add the total wattage for each voltage level to arrive at a total combined power usage on the  
power supply.  
Table 20-4. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage  
Current (maximum) at voltage levels:  
Device  
+3.3 V  
+ 5V stby  
+5 V  
+12 V  
-12 V  
PHP I/O baseboard  
5 A  
0.65 A  
4.32 A  
0.05 A  
0 A  
16-bit ISA slot, J3B  
32-bit primary PCI slot 1, P1  
32-bit primary PCI slot 2, P2  
32-bit secondary PCI slot 3, P3  
32-bit secondary PCI slot 4, P4  
32-bit secondary PCI slot 5, P5  
32-bit secondary PCI slot 6, P6  
64-bit PCI slot 7, P7  
64-bit PCI slot 8, P8  
64-bit PCI slot 9, P9  
64-bit PCI slot 10, P10  
CPU baseboard with four 65 W  
processors  
4.6 A  
6.2 A  
28.5 A  
Primary memory module (16 256MB  
DIMMs)  
13.6 A  
13.6 A  
Secondary memory module (16  
256MB DIMMs)  
3.5-inch diskette drive  
CD-ROM drive  
0.65 A  
0.55 A  
0.60 A  
1st SCA hard disk drive  
2nd SCA hard disk drive  
continued  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 20 Power System: Description/Calculating Power Usage  
Table 20-4. Worksheet for Calculating DC Power Usage (continued)  
Current (maximum) at voltage levels:  
Device  
+3.3 V  
+5 V stby  
+5 V  
+12 V  
-12 V  
Front panel plus six cooling fans  
4.0 A  
Total Current  
NOTE  
✏
The total combined wattage must be less than 935 watts for your server  
configuration. The current for each voltage level must be less than the limits  
prescribed by the above power supply output voltage specification; see  
Table 20-2.  
Table 20-5. Total Combined Power Used by Your Server  
Voltage Level and Total Current (V x A = W) Total Watts for Each Voltage Level  
(+3.3 V) x (  
(+5 V) x (  
(-5 V) x (  
A)  
A)  
A)  
A)  
A)  
W
W
W
W
W
(+12 V) x (  
(-12 V) x (  
(+5 V Standby) x (  
A)  
W
Total Combined Wattage =  
W
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Blank page  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing  
This chapter tells how to replace the lithium back-up battery on the PHP I/O baseboard.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any of  
the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Tools and Supplies You Need  
•
•
•
Flat-head) screwdriver (#1 bit and #2 bit)  
Antistatic wrist strap (recommended)  
Pen or pencil  
Equipment Log  
Use the equipment log form provided in Appendix B, “Equipment Log,” to record the model and  
serial numbers of the server, all installed options, and any other pertinent information about the  
server. You will need this information when running the SSU.  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Server System Product Guide  
Back-up Battery  
The lithium battery on the PHP I/O baseboard powers the real-time clock (RTC) for up to ten years  
in the absence of power. The RTC contains 256 bytes of general purpose RAM that stores the  
system BIOS configuration information, clock registers, and general purpose control registers.  
Contact your sales representative or dealer for a list of approved replacement devices and available  
service.  
CAUTION  
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the  
same or equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer.  
Discard used battery according to manufacturer’s instructions.  
ADVARSEL!  
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning  
må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte  
batteri tilbage til leverandøren.  
ADVARSEL!  
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosjonsfare. Ved utskifting benyttes kun batteri  
som anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukt batteri returneres  
apparatleverandøren.  
VARNING  
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller  
en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera  
använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.  
VAROITUS  
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo  
ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty  
paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 21 Back-up Battery: Replacing/Disposing  
Replacing the Back-up Battery  
See Figure 21-1.  
1. Observe the precautions on page 115, “Safety Guidelines.”  
2. Turn the server off and unplug the AC power cord.  
3. Remove the top cover as described in Chapter 12, “Server Covers: Removing/Reinstalling.”  
4. Using the tip of your finger, press down lightly on the lithium battery, and slide it toward the  
tabs on the socket.  
5. Gently lift the battery out of the socket, and dispose of it according to local ordinance.  
6. Remove the new battery from its package, and, being careful to observe correct polarity  
(positive-side up), gently insert it into the battery socket.  
7. Reinstall the top cover as described in Chapter 12.  
8. Run the SSU to restore the configuration settings to the RTC. For information about running  
this utility, see Chapter 5, “System Setup Utility: When to Run.”  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Server System Product Guide  
2
A
B
C
1
3
OM07316  
Figure 21-1. Lithium Back-up Battery  
A. Tab  
B. Positive-side up  
C. Battery  
White text  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error  
Messages  
This chapter helps you identify and solve problems that might occur while you are using the  
server.  
For detailed instructions about removing or installing a component or checking jumpers, see the  
chapter whose number appears in parentheses after a given checklist item. Also check the  
Contents and Index for specific page locations.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Resetting the Server  
You can reset the server in several ways.  
Manually  
Press  
To  
<Ctrl+Alt+Del>  
Reset button  
Power off/on  
Clear server memory and reload the operating system. This is a "soft boot" reset.  
Clear server memory, restart POST, and reload the operating system.  
Turn the server power off and then on. This is a "cold boot" reset; it has the same  
effect as pushing the reset button except that power is halted to all peripherals.  
Programmed  
You can reset the server with software.  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Initial Startup of the Server  
Problems that occur at initial startup are usually caused by incorrect installation or configuration of  
the server. Hardware failure is a less frequent cause.  
Checklist  
❑ Are all cables correctly connected and secured?  
❑ Are the processors packaged in S.E.C. cartridges fully seated in the slot 2 connectors on the  
CPU baseboard? (Chapter 13)  
❑ Are front side bus terminator modules installed in all unused slot 2 connectors on the CPU  
baseboard? (Chapter 13)  
❑ Are the memory modules fully seated in the connectors on the midplane? (Chapter 13)  
❑ Are all DIMMs on the memory module installed correctly? (Chapter 19)  
❑ Are all add-in ISA and PCI boards fully seated in their slots on the PHP I/O baseboard?  
(Chapter 13)  
❑ Are all jumper settings on the PHP I/O and CPU baseboards correct? (Chapters 17 and 18)  
❑ Are all jumper and switch settings on add-in boards and peripheral devices correct? To check  
settings, refer to the manufacturer’s documentation. Ensure there are no conflicts—for  
example, two add-in boards sharing the same interrupt.  
❑ Are all add-in boards installed correctly? (Chapter 13)  
❑ If the server has a hard disk drive, is it properly formatted or defined?  
❑ Is the disk backplane configured correctly? (Chapter 16)  
❑ Are all device drivers properly installed? (Chapter 2)  
❑ Are the configuration settings made with the SSU correct? (Chapter 5)  
❑ Is the operating system properly loaded? Refer to the operating system documentation.  
❑ Did you press the on/off power switch on the front panel to turn the server on (power-on LED  
should be lit)?  
❑ Is the power cord plugged into the AC inlet filter of the server and into a NEMA 5-15R outlet  
for 100-120 V~ or a NEMA 6-15R outlet for 200-240 V~? (Chapter 2)  
❑ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?  
If these items are correct but the problem recurs, refer to "More Troubleshooting Procedures" on  
page 264.  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Running New Application Software  
Problems that occur when you run new application software are usually related to the new  
software. Faulty equipment is much less likely, especially if other software runs correctly.  
Checklist  
❑ Does the server meet the minimum hardware requirements for the software? Refer to the  
software documentation.  
❑ Is the software an authorized copy? If not, get one; unauthorized copies often do not work.  
❑ If you are running the software from a diskette, is it a good copy?  
❑ If you are running the software from a CD, is it scratched or dirty?  
❑ If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, is the software correctly installed?  
Were all necessary procedures followed and files installed?  
❑ Are the correct device drivers installed?  
❑ Is the software correctly configured for the server?  
❑ Are you using the software correctly?  
If the problems persist, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative.  
After the Server Has Been Running Correctly  
Problems that occur after the server hardware and software have been running correctly often  
indicate equipment failure. Many situations that are easy to correct, however, can also cause such  
problems.  
Checklist  
❑ If you are running the software from a diskette, try a new copy of the software.  
❑ If you are running the software from a CD, try a different CD to see if the problem occurs on  
all CDs.  
❑ If you are running the software from a hard disk drive, try running it from a diskette. If the  
software runs correctly, there may be a problem with the copy on the hard disk drive. Reinstall  
the software on the hard disk drive, and try running it again. Make sure all the necessary files  
are installed.  
❑ If the problems are intermittent, there may be a loose cable, dirt in the keyboard (if keyboard  
input is incorrect), a marginal power supply, or other random component failures.  
❑ If you suspect that a transient voltage spike, power outage, or brownout might have occurred,  
reload the software and try running it again. (For example, symptoms of voltage spikes  
include a flickering video monitor, unexpected server reboots, and the server does not respond  
to user commands.)  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
NOTE  
✏
If you are getting random errors in your data files, they may be getting  
corrupted by voltage spikes on your power line. If you are experiencing any  
of the above symptoms that might indicate voltage spikes on the power line,  
you may want to install a surge suppressor between the power outlet and the  
server power cord.  
❑ If the problem recurs after you have checked and corrected all the above items, refer to "More  
Troubleshooting Procedures" on page 264.  
❑ If you receive any error messages, refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for an  
explanation and suggestions.  
More Troubleshooting Procedures  
This section provides a more detailed approach to identifying a problem and locating its source.  
Preparing the Server for Diagnostic Testing  
CAUTION  
Before disconnecting any peripheral cables from the server, turn off the  
server and any external peripheral devices. Failure to do so can cause  
permanent damage to the server and/or the peripheral devices.  
1. Turn off the server and all external peripheral devices. Disconnect all devices from the server,  
except the keyboard and video monitor.  
2. Make sure the server power cord is plugged into a properly grounded AC outlet. (Chapter 2)  
3. Make sure your video monitor and keyboard are correctly connected to the server. Turn on the  
monitor. Set its brightness and contrast controls to at least two-thirds of their maximum  
ranges (refer to the documentation supplied with your monitor).  
4. If the operating system normally loads from the hard disk drive, make sure there is no diskette  
in drive A. If the OS normally loads from a diskette, place the diskette containing the OS files  
in drive A.  
5. Turn on the server. If the power LED does not light, refer to "Power Light Does Not Light" on  
page 266.  
Monitoring POST  
See Chapter 3.  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Verifying Proper Operation of the Server Lights  
As POST determines the server configuration, it tests for the presence of each mass storage device  
installed in the server. As each device is checked, its activity light should turn on briefly. Check  
for the following:  
❑ Does the diskette drive activity light turn on briefly? If not, refer to "Diskette Drive Activity  
Light Does Not Light" on page 268.  
❑ If there is a hard disk drive or a SCSI device installed in the server, does the drive activity light  
on the front panel turn on briefly? If not, refer to "Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not  
Light" on page 268.  
NOTE  
✏
For information about the controls and indicators, see Chapter 1.  
Confirming Loading of the Operating System  
Once the server boots up, the operating system prompt appears on the screen. The prompt varies  
according to the operating system. If the operating system prompt does not appear, refer to "Initial  
Startup of the Server" on page 262.  
Specific Problems and Corrective Actions  
This section provides possible solutions for the following specific problems:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Power light does not light.  
Server cooling fans do not rotate or rotate slowly.  
No characters appear on screen.  
Characters on the screen appear distorted or incorrect.  
No beep or incorrect beep pattern emitted.  
Activity light on the diskette drive does not light.  
Activity light on the hard disk drive does not light.  
Activity light on the CD-ROM drive does not light.  
Application software problems are unresolved.  
Server powers up, and it immediately powers down.  
Try the solutions in the order given. If you cannot correct the problem, contact your service  
representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Power Light Does Not Light  
Check the following:  
❑ Is the server operating normally? If so, the power LED is probably defective.  
❑ Are there other problems with the server? If so, check the items listed under "Server Cooling  
Fans Do Not Rotate Properly."  
❑ Is the yellow power supply failure LED flashing? If so, replace the failing power supply.  
If all items are correct and problems persist, contact your service representative or authorized  
dealer for assistance.  
Server Cooling Fans Do Not Rotate Properly  
If the server cooling fans are not operating properly, server components will be damaged.  
NOTE  
✏
The server contains six fans that provide cooling for the components. The  
integrated fan on each power supply provides more cooling for the SCSI  
hard disk drives in the hot-docking bays. In case of cooling problems, you  
cannot access or replace the fans integrated in the power supplies. There are  
no serviceable components in the power supply. If the power supply is  
opened, the warranty is voided.  
Check the following:  
❑ Is AC power available at the wall outlet?  
❑ Is the server power cord properly connected to AC inlet filter and the wall outlet?  
❑ Did you press the power on/off push-button switch?  
❑ Is the power-on light lit?  
❑ Have any of the fan motors stopped (use the server management subsystem to check the fan  
status)?  
If switches and connections are correct and AC power is available at the wall outlet, contact your  
service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
No Characters Appear on Screen  
Check the following:  
❑ Is the keyboard working?  
❑ Is the video monitor plugged in and turned on?  
❑ Are the brightness and contrast controls on the video monitor properly adjusted?  
❑ Are the switch settings on the video monitor correct?  
❑ Is the video monitor signal cable properly installed?  
If you are using an add-in video controller board, do the following:  
1. Verify that the video controller board is fully seated in the PHP I/O baseboard connector.  
2. Run the SSU to specify that an add-in VGA/EGA controller board is installed.  
3. Reboot the server for changes to take effect.  
4. If there are still no characters on the screen after you reboot the server and POST emits a beep  
code, write down the beep code you hear. This information is useful for your service  
representative. See "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269.  
5. If you do not receive a beep code and characters do not appear, the video monitor or video  
controller may have failed. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for  
assistance.  
Characters Are Distorted or Incorrect  
Check the following:  
❑ Are the brightness and contrast controls properly adjusted on the video monitor? Refer to the  
manufacturer’s documentation.  
❑ Are the video monitor signal and power cables properly installed?  
If the problem persists, the monitor may be faulty or it may be the incorrect type. Contact your  
service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
Incorrect or no Beep Codes  
If the server operates normally but there was no beep, the speaker may be defective. Run the SSU  
to verify that the speaker is enabled (Chapter 5). If the speaker is enabled but not functioning,  
contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
Record the beep code emitted by POST, and refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for  
information about beep codes and error messages.  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Diskette Drive Activity Light Does Not Light  
Check the following:  
❑ Are the power and signal cables to the diskette drive properly installed?  
❑ Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the diskette drive set correctly?  
❑ Is the diskette drive properly configured?  
❑ Is the diskette drive activity light always on? If so, the signal cable may be plugged in  
incorrectly.  
If you are using the onboard diskette controller, use the SSU to make sure that controller is  
enabled. If you are using an add-in diskette controller, make sure that the onboard controller is  
disabled. (Chapter 5)  
If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the diskette drive, PHP I/O baseboard, or  
drive signal cable. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
Hard Disk Drive Activity Light Does Not Light  
If you have installed one or more hard disk drives in your server, check the following:  
❑ Are the power and signal cables to the IDE hard disk drive properly installed?  
❑ Are all relevant switches and jumpers on the hard disk drive and controller board set correctly?  
❑ Is the onboard IDE controller enabled?  
NOTE  
✏
The hard disk drive activity light on the front panel lights when either an  
IDE hard disk drive or SCSI device is in use.  
❑ Is the hard disk drive properly configured?  
❑ Are the SCSI signal cables properly connected to the peripheral bay backplane?  
If you received error messages, refer to "Error Codes and Messages" on page 269 for information  
about error messages.  
If you did not receive error messages, run the SSU and make sure the hard disk drive is configured  
with the correct parameters. (Chapter 5)  
If the problem persists, there may be a problem with the hard disk drive, PHP I/O baseboard, drive  
signal cable, or LED connector. Contact your service representative or authorized dealer for  
assistance.  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Problems With Application Software  
If you have problems with application software, do the following:  
1. Verify that the software is properly configured for the server. Refer to the software installation  
and operation documentation to set up and use the software.  
2. Try a different copy of the software to see if the problem is with the copy you are using.  
3. Make sure all cables are installed correctly.  
4. Verify that the baseboard jumpers are set correctly.  
5. If other software runs correctly on the server, contact your vendor about the failing software.  
If the problem persists, contact the software vendor’s customer service representative for  
assistance.  
Server Powers Up and Immediately Powers Down  
If the server powers up after a DC power failure and then immediately powers down, check the  
power supply failure LED. If it is lit, wait until it goes out before turning the server back on. If  
the LED does not go out, you may have to unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlets. When  
the LED goes out, plug the power cords back into the outlets.  
If the problem persists, the power distribution backplane may be defective. Contact your service  
representative or authorized dealer for assistance.  
Error Codes and Messages  
The server BIOS displays POST error codes and messages on the video monitor. When you turn  
on the server, POST displays messages that provide information about the server. If a failure  
occurs, POST emits beep codes that indicate errors in hardware, software, or firmware. Before the  
video adapter is initialized, audible beep codes inform you of errors. The errors are logged in the  
event log and the Extended BIOS Data Area (EBDA). If POST can display a message on the  
monitor, it causes the speaker to beep twice as the message appears.  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Port 80h Codes  
After the video adapter has been successfully initialized after the server is turned on, the BIOS  
indicates the current testing phase during POST by writing a 2-digit hex code to I/O location 80h.  
If a port-80h card is installed, it displays this 2-digit code on a pair of hex display LEDs.  
The following table contains the port-80h codes displayed during the boot process. The table also  
describes the error conditions associated with each beep code and the corresponding POST  
checkpoint (CP) code as seen by a port-80h card. A beep code is a series of individual beeps  
emitted by the server speaker, each equal in length. For example, if an error occurs at checkpoint  
20h, a beep code of 1-3-1-1 is generated (1 = a single beep, 3 = burst of three beeps).  
CP  
02  
04  
06  
08  
09  
0A  
0B  
0C  
0E  
0F  
10  
11  
12  
14  
16  
18  
1A  
1C  
20  
22  
24  
28  
2A  
2C  
2E  
30  
32  
34  
35  
36  
Beeps  
Reason  
Verify real mode  
Get processor type  
Initialize system hardware  
Initialize chip set registers with initial POST values  
Set in-POST flag  
Initialize processor registers  
Enable processor cache  
Initialize caches to initial POST values  
Initialize I/O  
Initialize the local bus IDE  
Initialize Power Management  
Load alternate registers with initial new POST values  
Restore processor control word during warm boot  
Initialize keyboard controller  
BIOS ROM checksum  
1-2-2-3  
Initialize 8254 timer  
Initialize 8237 DMA controller  
Reset Programmable Interrupt Controller  
Test DRAM refresh  
1-3-1-1  
1-3-1-3  
Test 8742 Keyboard Controller  
Set ES segment register to 4 GB  
Autosize DRAM  
1-3-3-1  
Clear 512K base RAM  
1-3-4-1  
1-3-4-3  
1-4-1-1  
RAM failure on address line xxxx*  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of low byte of memory bus  
RAM failure on data bits xxxx* of high byte of memory bus  
Test processor bus-clock frequency  
Test CMOS  
RAM initialize alternate chip set registers  
Warm start shutdown  
continued  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Port 80h Codes (continued)  
CP  
37  
38  
39  
3A  
3C  
3D  
40  
42  
44  
46  
47  
48  
49  
4A  
4B  
4C  
4E  
50  
52  
54  
56  
58  
5A  
5C  
60  
62  
64  
66  
68  
6A  
6C  
6E  
70  
72  
74  
76  
7A  
7C  
7E  
Beeps  
Reason  
Reinitialize the chip set (MB only)  
Shadow system BIOS ROM  
Reinitialize the cache (MB only)  
Autosize cache  
Configure advanced chip set registers  
Load alternate registers with new CMOS values  
Set initial new processor speed  
Initialize interrupt vectors  
Initialize BIOS interrupts  
2-1-2-3  
Check ROM copyright notice  
Initialize manager for PCI Option ROMs  
Check video configuration against CMOS  
Initialize PCI bus and devices  
Initialize all video adapters in system  
Display QuietBoot screen  
Shadow video BIOS ROM  
Display copyright notice  
Display processor type and speed  
Test keyboard  
Set key click if enabled  
Enable keyboard  
2-2-3-1  
Test for unexpected interrupts  
Display prompt "Press F2 to enter SETUP"  
Test RAM between 512 and 640k  
Test extended memory  
Test extended memory address lines  
Jump to UserPatch1  
Configure advanced cache registers  
Enable external and processor caches  
Display external cache size  
Display shadow message  
Display nondisposable segments  
Display error messages  
Check for configuration errors  
Test real-time clock  
Check for keyboard errors  
Test for key lock on  
Set up hardware interrupt vectors  
Test coprocessor if present  
continued  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Port 80h Codes (continued)  
CP  
80  
82  
85  
86  
88  
8A  
8C  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
98  
Beeps  
Reason  
Detect and install external RS232 ports  
Detect and install external parallel ports  
Initialize PC-compatible PnP ISA devices  
Reinitialize onboard I/O ports  
Initialize BIOS Data Area  
Initialize Extended BIOS Data Area  
Initialize floppy controller  
Initialize hard disk controller  
Initialize local bus hard disk controller  
Jump to UserPatch2  
Build MPTABLE for multiprocessor boards  
Disable A20 address line  
Install CD ROM for boot  
Clear huge ES segment register  
1-2  
Search for option ROMs; one long beep and two short beeps on  
checksum failure  
9A  
9C  
9E  
A0  
A2  
A4  
A8  
AA  
AC  
AE  
B0  
B2  
B4  
B5  
B6  
B8  
BC  
BE  
BF  
C0  
D0  
D2  
D4  
Shadow option ROMs  
Set up Power Management  
Enable hardware interrupts  
Set time of day  
Check key lock  
Initialize typematic rate  
Erase F2 prompt  
Scan for F2 key stroke  
Enter SETUP  
Clear in-POST flag  
Check for errors  
POST done—prepare to boot operating system  
One short beep before boot  
Display MultiBoot menu  
Check password (optional)  
Clear global descriptor table  
Clear parity checkers  
1
Clear screen (optional)  
Check virus and backup reminders  
Try to boot with INT 19  
Interrupt handler error  
Unknown interrupt error  
Pending interrupt error  
continued  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
Port 80h Codes (continued)  
CP  
D6  
D8  
DA  
DC  
FB  
FC  
FD  
Beeps  
Reason  
Initialize option ROM error  
Shutdown error  
Extended Block Move  
Shutdown 10 error  
FRB in progress  
Five second wait for BMC to initialize  
FRB 2 watchdog timer failed, reset will occur in five seconds  
POST Error Codes and Messages  
The table below contains POST error codes and their associated messages.  
Code  
0002  
0010  
0015  
0016  
0042  
0050  
0051  
0052  
0053  
0054  
0055  
0056  
0060  
0070  
0080  
0083  
0085  
0131  
0132  
0135  
0140  
0170  
0171  
0172  
0173  
0174  
0175  
Error message  
Primary boot device not found  
Cache memory failure, do not enable cache  
Primary output device not found  
Primary input device not found  
ISA Config contains invalid info  
PnP memory conflict  
PnP 32-bit memory conflict  
PnP IRQ conflict  
PnP DMA conflict  
PnP error log is full  
Bad PnP serial id checksum  
Bad PnP resource data checksum  
Keyboard is locked ... Please unlock it  
CMOS time & date not set  
Option ROM has bad checksum  
Shadow of PCI ROM failed  
Shadow of ISA ROM failed  
Floppy drive A:  
Floppy drive B:  
Floppy disk controller failure  
Shadow of System BIOS Failed  
Disabled CPU slot #  
CPU Failure—CPU # 1  
CPU Failure—CPU # 2  
CPU Failure—CPU # 3  
CPU Failure—CPU # 4  
CPU modules are incompatible or one is not present.  
continued  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)  
Code  
0176  
0177  
0178  
0179  
0180  
0181  
0191  
0195  
0198  
0289  
0295  
0297  
0299  
0370  
0373  
0375  
0430  
0440  
0441  
0445  
0446  
0450  
0451  
0452  
0460  
0461  
0465  
0467  
0510  
0710  
0711  
0780  
0781  
0782  
0783  
0784  
0785  
0800  
0801  
Error message  
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 1  
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 2  
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 3  
Previous CPU Failure—CPU # 4  
Attempting to boot with failed CPU  
BSP switched, system may be in uniprocessor mode  
CMOS battery failed  
CMOS system options not set  
CMOS checksum invalid  
System memory size mismatch  
Address line short detected  
Memory size decreased  
ECC Error Correction failure  
Keyboard controller error  
Keyboard stuck key detected  
Keyboard and mouse swapped  
Timer Channel 2 failure  
Gate-A20 failure  
Unexpected interrupt in protected mode  
Master interrupt controller error  
Slave interrupt controller error  
Master DMA controller error  
Slave DMA controller error  
DMA controller error  
Fail-safe timer NMI failure  
Software port NMI failure  
Bus time-out NMI in slot  
Expansion board NMI in slot  
PCI parity error  
Baseboard device resource conflict  
Static device resource conflict  
PCI Segment 1 memory request exceeds 998 MB  
PCI Segment 1 I/O requests exceeds 12K  
PCI I/O request exceeds amount available  
PCI memory request exceeds amount available  
Illegal bus for memory request below 1 MB  
Memory request below 1 MB exceeds 1 MB  
PCI I/O port conflict  
PCI memory conflict  
continued  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 22 Solving Problems: Troubleshooting/Error Messages  
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)  
Code  
0802  
0804  
0805  
0806  
0810  
0811  
0812  
0815  
0816  
0817  
0820  
0900  
0903  
0982  
0984  
0985  
0986  
0987  
8100  
8101  
8102  
8103  
8104  
8105  
8106  
8107  
8108  
810B  
810C  
810D  
810E  
810F  
8110  
8128  
8129  
8130  
8131  
8138  
8139  
Error message  
PCI IRQ conflict  
PCI ROM not found, may be OK for this card  
Insufficient memory to shadow PCI ROM  
Memory allocation failure for second PCI segment  
Floppy disk controller resource conflict  
Primary IDE controller resource conflict  
Secondary IDE controller resource conflict  
Parallel port resource conflict  
Serial port 1 resource conflict  
Serial port 2 resource conflict  
Expansion board disabled in slot  
NVRAM checksum error, NVRAM cleared  
NVRAM data invalid, NVRAM cleared  
I/O expansion board NMI in slot  
Expansion board disabled in slot  
Fail-safe timer NMI  
System reset caused by watchdog timer  
Bus time-out NMI in slot  
Processor 0 failed BIST  
Processor 1 failed BIST  
Processor 2 failed BIST  
Processor 3 failed BIST  
Processor 0 internal error (IERR)  
Processor 1 internal error (IERR)  
Processor 0 thermal trip error  
Processor 1 thermal trip error  
Watchdog timer failed on last boot  
Processor 0 failed initialization  
Processor 0 disabled  
Processor 1 disabled  
Processor 0 failed FRB-3 timer  
Processor 1 failed FRB-3 timer  
Server management interface failed to function  
Processor 2 internal error (IERR)  
Processor 3 internal error (IERR)  
Processor 2 thermal trip error  
Processor 3 thermal trip error  
Processor 2 failed FRB-3 timer  
Processor 3 failed FRB-3 timer  
continued  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
POST Error Codes and Messages (continued)  
Code  
8140  
8141  
8148  
8149  
814A  
8150  
8152  
8153  
8160  
8161  
8162  
8163  
8168  
8169  
816A  
816B  
8170  
8171  
8172  
8173  
8180  
8181  
8182  
8200  
8201  
8203  
8204  
Error message  
Processor 2 disabled  
Processor 3 disabled  
Processor 1 failed initialization  
Processor 2 failed initialization  
Processor 3 failed initialization  
NVRAM cleared by jumper  
ESCD data cleared  
Password cleared by jumper  
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 1  
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 2  
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 3  
Unable to apply BIOS update for processor 4  
Processor 1 L2 cache failed  
Processor 2 L2 cache failed  
Processor 3 L2 cache failed  
Processor 4 L2 cache failed  
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 1  
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 2  
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 3  
BIOS does not support current stepping for processor 4  
PXB1 failed to respond  
Mismatch among processors detected  
L2 cache size mismatch  
Baseboard management controller failed to function  
Front panel controller failed to function  
Primary hot-swap controller failed to function  
Secondary hot-swap controller failed to function  
White text  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
23 Front Panel: Description/Voltages  
This chapter describes the front panel.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Front Panel Board  
The front panel board provides the user interface to the server. Three push-button switches control  
server power, reset, and NMI assertion. Four LEDs indicate power on, power supply failure, hard  
drive failure, and fan or other server cooling failure. The LCD panel provides information about  
the server such as boot status, available number of processors, and other server management  
information.  
The front panel board also allows other servers to communicate with this server—even while  
power is down—via an external Intelligent Chassis Management Bus (ICMB). The ICMB is an  
extension of the internal ICMB. A Phillips 80C652 microcontroller on the board controls all front  
panel functions while AC power is available.  
The board connects to the rest of the server through a connector on the CPU baseboard. All six  
system fans plug into hot-plug connectors on the front panel board. The microcontroller controls  
fan speed, monitors fan tachometer outputs, and indicates via LEDs—one for each fan—when fan  
failures occur. The converter circuit converts 8.4 VDC to 12 VDC and provides over current  
protection.  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Fan Speed Control Voltage  
The server fans operate at two speeds: slow and fast. The low voltage setting allows the fans to  
run at a slower speed to minimize acoustic noise under normal conditions. When the Front Panel  
Controller (FPC) senses a fan failure or the ambient air temperature sensor reads 30 °C or higher, it  
sets the fan voltage to high to increase the fan speed. The ambient air temperature must drop to  
28 °C or the failing condition must be cleared before the FPC returns the fans to slow speed again.  
When the ambient air temperature reads between 28 °C and 30 °C, the fans remain at their current  
speed.  
Table 23-1. Fan Speed Control  
Fan Failure  
Ambient Air Temperature  
Fan Speed  
Slow  
Voltage  
Low  
No  
<28°C  
<28°C  
>30°C  
>30°C  
Yes  
No  
Fast  
High  
Fast  
High  
Yes  
Fast  
High  
Speaker  
Either the FPC or the PHP I/O baseboard can control the speaker on the front panel board.  
I2C Bus  
The private I2C bus monitors failures and voltage margining in the server. The 5 V standby  
voltage provides power for the bus, and it is available even when server power is off.  
White text  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
This chapter describes the peripheral bay blindmate board.  
Warnings and Cautions  
Only a qualified service technician is authorized to remove the server covers and to access any  
of the components inside the server. Before removing the covers, see “Safety Guidelines” on  
page 115.  
Features  
The peripheral bay blindmate board provides power and signal interconnection from the midplane  
and PHP I/O baseboard to the system peripheral devices (diskette drive and CD ROM drive) and  
the disk backplane.  
Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors  
A
B
C
D
E
F
OM07329  
Figure 24-1. Peripheral Bay Blindmate Connectors  
A. Bindmate connector (J1)  
B. Power connector (J2)  
C. Wide SCSI connector (J5)  
D. Reserved (J6)  
E. IDE connector (J4)  
F. Diskette connector (J3)  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Blind Mate Connector J1  
Signals  
Pins  
1
A
B
C
D
E
RESET(1)  
DD7 (3)  
DD6 (5)  
DD5 (7)  
DD4 (9)  
DD3 (11)  
DD2 (13)  
DD1 (15)  
DD0 (17)  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+5v  
DD8 (4)  
DD9 (6)  
GND  
FD_DSKCHG_L  
FD_HDSEL_L  
FD_RDATA_L  
FD_WPROT_L  
FD_MSEN0  
FD_TRK0_L  
FD_WGATE_L  
FD_WDATA_L  
FD_STEP_L  
FD_DIR_L  
FD_MSEN1  
FD_MTR1_L  
FD_DR0_L  
FD_DR1_L  
FD_MTR0_L  
FD_INDEX_L  
FD_DRATE0  
KEY  
2
GND  
3
DD10 (8)  
GND  
4
DD11 (10)  
DD12 (12)  
DD13 (14)  
DD14 (16)  
DD15 (18)  
GND  
GND  
5
GND  
6
GND  
7
GND  
8
GND  
9
GND  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
DIOW (23)  
CSEL (28)  
DIOR (25)  
GND  
GND  
DMARQ (21)  
GND  
GND  
GND  
IORDY (27)  
DMACK (29)  
GND  
GND  
RESERVED (32)  
PDIAG (34)  
DA2 (36)  
GND  
GND  
INTRQ (31)  
DA1 (33)  
DASP (39)  
GND  
GND  
CS0 (37)  
GND  
DA0 (35)  
GND  
CS1 (38)  
GND  
N/C  
GND  
GND  
GND  
FD_DENSEL  
OEM 1  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
S68 (-DB 11)  
S34 (+DB 11)  
S65 (-DB8)  
S31 (+DB 8)  
S62 (-C/D)  
S28 (+C/D)  
S59 (-RST)  
S25 (+RST)  
S56  
GND  
OEM 2  
GND  
GND  
OEM 3  
GND  
S32 (+DB 9)  
S66 (-DB 9)  
S29 (+REQ)  
S63 (-REQ)  
S26 (+MSG)  
S60 (-MSG)  
S23 (+BSY)  
S57 (-BSY)  
S20  
S67 (-DB 10)  
S33 (+DB 10)  
S64 (-I/O)  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
S30 (+I/O)  
S61 (-SEL)  
S27 (+SEL)  
S58 (-ACK)  
S24 (+ACK)  
S55 (-ATN)  
S21 (+ATN)  
S52 (TERMPWR)  
S18 (TERMPWR)  
S49  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
+12v  
S22  
+12v  
S53 (RESERVED)  
S19 (RESERVED)  
S50  
+12v  
S54  
+12v  
S17 (TERMPWR)  
S51 (TERMPWR)  
S14 (+DB P)  
S48 (-DB P)  
S11 (+DB5)  
S45 (-DB 5)  
S8 (+DB 2)  
S42 (-DB 2)  
S5 (+DB P1)  
S39 (-DB P1)  
S2 (+DB 13)  
S36 (-DB 13)  
GND  
+12v  
S16 (DIFFSENS)  
S47 (-DB 7)  
S13 (+DB 7)  
S44 (-DB 4)  
S10 (+DB 4)  
S41 (-DB 1)  
S7 (+DB 1)  
S38 (-DB 15)  
S4 (+DB 15)  
S35 (-DB 12)  
S1 (+DB 12)  
GND  
+12v  
+5v  
S15  
+5v  
+5v  
S46 (-DB 6)  
S12 (+DB 6)  
S43 (-DB 3)  
S9 (+DB 3)  
S40 (-DB 0)  
S6 (+DB 0)  
S37 (-DB 14)  
S3 (+DB 14)  
GND  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
+5v  
GND  
SDA  
Reserved  
+5v  
+5v  
GND  
PWR_GOOD  
SCL  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
Power Connector J2  
Pin Signal  
Pin Signal  
11 +12v  
12 GND  
13 +12v  
14 +5v  
1
+12v  
2
GND  
3
+12v  
4
+5v  
5
GND  
15 GND  
16 +5v  
6
+5v  
7
GND  
17 GND  
18 SDA  
19 GND  
20 Reserved  
8
SCL  
9
GND  
10  
PWR_GOOD  
Diskette Connector J3  
Pin Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
GND  
2
FD_DENSEL  
N/C  
3
GND  
4
5
KEY  
6
FD_DRATE0  
FD_INDEX_L  
FD_MTR0_L  
FD_DR1_L  
7
GND  
8
9
GND  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
GND  
GND  
FD_DR0_L  
GND  
FD_MTR1_L  
FD_DIR_L  
FD_MSEN1  
GND  
FD_STEP_L  
FD_WDATA_L  
FD_WGATE_L  
FD_TRK0_L  
FD_WPROT_L  
FD_RDATA_L  
FD_HDSEL_L  
FD_DSKCHG_L  
GND  
GND  
GND  
FD_MSEN0  
GND  
GND  
GND  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
IDE Connector J4  
Pin  
Signal  
RESET  
DD7  
Pin  
Signal  
GND  
1
2
3
4
DD8  
5
DD6  
6
DD9  
7
DD5  
8
DD10  
DD11  
DD12  
DD13  
DD14  
DD15  
KEYPIN (NC)  
GND  
9
DD4  
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
22  
24  
26  
28  
30  
32  
34  
36  
38  
40  
11  
13  
15  
17  
19  
21  
23  
25  
27  
29  
31  
33  
35  
37  
39  
DD3  
DD2  
DD1  
DD0  
GND  
DMARQ  
DIOW  
DIOR  
IORDY  
DMACK  
INTRQ  
DA1  
GND  
GND  
CSEL  
GND  
RESERVED  
PDIAG  
DA2  
DA0  
CS0  
CS1  
DASP  
GND  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Chapter 24 Peripheral Bay Blindmate Board: Description  
Wide SCSI Connector J5  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
Signal  
1
S1 (+DB 12)  
S2 (+DB 13)  
S3 (+DB 14)  
S4 (+DB 15)  
S5 (+DB P1)  
S6 (+DB 0)  
S7 (+DB 1)  
S8 (+DB 2)  
S9 (DB 3)  
S35 (-DB 12)  
S36 (-DB 13)  
S37 (-DB 14)  
S38 (-DB 15)  
S39 (-DB P1)  
S40 (-DB 0)  
S41 (-DB 1)  
S42 (-DB 2)  
S43 (-DB 3)  
S44 (-DB 4)  
S45 (-DB 5)  
S46 (-DB 6)  
S47 (-DB 7)  
S48 (-DB P)  
S49  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
S10 (+DB 4)  
S11 (+DB5)  
S12 (+DB 6)  
S13 (+DB 7)  
S14 (+DB P)  
S15  
S16 (DIFFSENS)  
S17 (TERMPWR)  
S18 (TERMPWR)  
S19 (RESERVED)  
S20  
S50  
S51 (TERMPWR)  
S52 (TERMPWR)  
S53 (RESERVED)  
S54  
S21 (+ATN)  
S22  
S55 (-ATN)  
S56  
S23 (+BSY)  
S24 (+ACK)  
S25 (+RST)  
S26 (+MSG)  
S27 (+SEL)  
S28 (+C/D)  
S29 (+REQ)  
S30 (+I/O)  
S57 (-BSY)  
S58 (-ACK)  
S59 (-RST)  
S60 (-MSG)  
S61 (-SEL)  
S62 (-C/D)  
S63 (-REQ)  
S64 (-I/O)  
S31 (+DB 8)  
S32 (+DB 9)  
S33 (DB +10)  
S34 (DB +11)  
S65 (-DB8)  
S66 (-DB 9)  
S67 (-DB 10)  
S68 (-DB 11)  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Regulatory Specifications  
The AC450NX server meets specifications and regulations for safety and EMC.  
Declaration of Compliance  
The CE marking on this product indicates that it is in compliance with the European community’s  
EMC Directive (89/336/EEC) and Low Voltage Directive (73123/EEC)  
Safety Compliance  
USA/Canada: UL 1950-CSA 950-95  
Europe: TUV to EN60950 (A1+A2+A3+A4)  
EU Low Voltage Directive (73/23/EEC) (CE Mark)  
International: CB Certificate to IEC950 plus EMKO-TSE(74-SEC) 207/94  
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)  
USA: FCC 47 CFR Parts 2 and 15, Class A  
Canada: ICES-003 Class A  
Europe: EN55022, Class A  
EN50082-1  
EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge (ESD)  
EN61000-4-3 Radiated Immunity  
IEN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient  
EN 61000-3-2; -3, Harmonic Currents  
EU EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (CE Mark)  
International: CISPR 22, Class A  
Australia/New Zealand: AS/NZS 3548, Class A Limits (using CISPR 22 Class A Limits)  
Japan: VCCI Class A ITE (using CISPR 22 Class A Limit)  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notice (USA)  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device,  
pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection  
against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This  
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in  
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.  
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which  
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
NOTE  
✏
If a Class A device is installed within this system, then the system is to be  
considered a Class A system. In this configuration, operation of this  
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference.  
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices (International)  
English translation of the notice above:  
This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for Interference  
by Information Technology Equipment (VCCI). If this equipment is used in a domestic  
environment, radio disturbance may arise. When such trouble occurs, the user may be required to  
take corrective actions.  
Cet appareil numérique respecte les limites bruits radioélectriques applicables aux appareils  
numériques de Classe A prescrites dans la norme sur le matériel brouilleur: “Appareils  
Numériques”, NMB-003 édictée par le Ministre Canadian des Communications.  
English translation of the notice above:  
This digital apparatus does not exceed the Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital  
apparatus set out in the interference-causing equipment standard entitled “Digital Apparatus,”  
ICES-003 of the Canadian Department of Communications.  
White text  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B Equipment Log  
Use this equipment log to record pertinent information about your server. You will need some of  
this information when you run the System Setup Utility (SSU).  
Record the model and serial numbers of the server components, dates of component removal or  
replacement, and the vendor’s name. Be sure to record the same information for any components  
added to the server, such as hard disk drives, add-in boards, or printers.  
The location of serial numbers on add-in boards, hard disk drives, and external equipment, such as  
video monitors or printers, varies from one manufacturer to another.  
Equipment Log  
Component  
Manufacturer and Model Number  
Serial Number  
Date Installed  
Server  
PHP I/O Baseboard  
I/O Riser Card  
CPU Baseboard  
Front Panel Board  
Processor 1  
Processor 2  
Processor 3  
Processor 4  
VRM 1  
VRM 2  
VRM 3  
VRM 4  
VRM 5  
VRM 6  
Memory Module 1  
Memory Module 2  
Midplane  
Peripheral Bay Backplane  
Hot-swappable Power Supply  
Hot-swappable Power Supply  
Hot-swappable Power Supply  
Video Monitor  
Keyboard  
Mouse  
continued  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Equipment Log (continued)  
Component  
Manufacturer and Model Number  
Serial Number  
Date Installed  
Diskette Drive  
Tape Drive  
IDE CD-ROM Drive  
SCSI CD-ROM Drive  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 1  
SCSI SCA Hard Disk Drive 2  
VGA/EGA Adapter Board  
SCSI Host Adapter Board  
PCI RAID Controller Board  
Hot-swappable Fan 1  
Hot-swappable Fan 2  
Hot-swappable Fan 3  
Hot-swappable Fan 4  
Hot-swappable Fan 5  
Hot-swappable Fan 6  
White text  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
C Warnings  
WARNING: English (US)  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français  
WARNUNG: Deutsch  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
WARNING: English (US)  
The power supply in this product contains no user-serviceable parts. There may be more  
than one supply in this product. Refer servicing only to qualified personnel.  
Do not attempt to modify or use the supplied AC power cord if it is not the exact type  
required.  
The DC push-button on/off switch on the system does not turn off system AC power. To  
remove AC power from the system, you must unplug each AC power cord from the wall  
outlet or power supply.  
SAFETY STEPS: Whenever you remove the chassis covers to access the inside of the  
system, follow these steps:  
1. Turn off all peripheral devices connected to the system.  
2. Turn off the system by using the push-button on/off power switch on the system.  
3. Unplug all AC power cords from the system or from wall outlets.  
4. Label and disconnect all cables connected to I/O connectors or ports on the back of the  
system.  
5. Provide some electrostatic discharge (ESD) protection by wearing an antistatic wrist  
strap attached to chassis ground of the system—any unpainted metal surface—when  
handling components.  
6. Do not operate the system with the chassis covers removed.  
After you have completed the six SAFETY steps above, you can remove the system covers.  
To do this:  
1. Remove and save all screws from the covers.  
2. Remove the covers.  
For proper cooling and airflow, always reinstall the chassis covers before turning on the  
system. Operating the system without the covers in place can damage system parts. To  
install the covers:  
1. Check first to make sure you have not left loose tools or parts inside the system.  
2. Check that cables, add-in boards, and other components are properly installed.  
3. Attach the covers to the chassis with the screws removed earlier, and tighten them  
firmly.  
4. Connect all external cables and the AC power cord(s) to the system.  
continued  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Warnings  
WARNING: English (continued)  
A microprocessor and heat sink may be hot if the system has been running. Also, there may  
be sharp pins and edges on some board and chassis parts. Contact should be made with  
care. Consider wearing protective gloves.  
Danger of explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or  
equivalent type recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Discard used batteries ac-  
cording to manufacturer’s instructions.  
The system is designed to operate in a typical office environment. Choose a site that is:  
•
•
•
•
•
Clean and free of airborne particles (other than normal room dust).  
Well ventilated and away from sources of heat including direct sunlight.  
Away from sources of vibration or physical shock.  
Isolated from strong electromagnetic fields produced by electrical devices.  
In regions that are susceptible to electrical storms, we recommend you plug your  
system into a surge suppresser and disconnect telecommunication lines to your modem  
during an electrical storm.  
•
•
Provided with a properly grounded wall outlet.  
Provided with sufficient space to access the power supply cords, because they serve as  
the product’s main power disconnect.  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français  
Le bloc d'alimentation de ce produit ne contient aucune pièce pouvant être réparée par  
l'utilisateur. Ce produit peut contenir plus d'un bloc d'alimentation. Veuillez contacter un  
technicien qualifié en cas de problème.  
Ne pas essayer d'utiliser ni modifier le câble d'alimentation CA fourni, s'il ne correspond pas  
exactement au type requis.  
Notez que le commutateur CC de mise sous tension /hors tension du panneau avant n'éteint  
pas l'alimentation CA du système. Pour mettre le système hors tension, vous devez  
débrancher chaque câble d'alimentation de sa prise.  
CONSIGNES DE SÉCURITÉ - Lorsque vous ouvrez le boîtier pour accéder à l’intérieur du  
système, suivez les consignes suivantes :  
1. Mettez hors tension tous les périphériques connectés au système.  
2. Mettez le système hors tension en mettant l’interrupteur général en position OFF  
(bouton-poussoir).  
3. Débranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c.a. du système et des prises murales.  
4. Identifiez et débranchez tous les câbles reliés aux connecteurs d’E-S ou aux accès  
derrière le système.  
5. Pour prévenir les décharges électrostatiques lorsque vous touchez aux composants,  
portez une bande antistatique pour poignet et reliez-la à la masse du système (toute  
surface métallique non peinte du boîtier).  
6. Ne faites pas fonctionner le système tandis que le boîtier est ouvert.  
Une fois TOUTES les étapes précédentes accomplies, vous pouvez retirer les panneaux du  
système. Procédez comme suit :  
1. Retirez toutes les vis des panneaux et mettez-les dans un endroit sûr.  
2. Retirez les panneaux.  
Afin de permettre le refroidissement et l’aération du système, réinstallez toujours les  
panneaux du boîtier avant de mettre le système sous tension. Le fonctionnement du  
système en l’absence des panneaux risque d’endommager ses pièces. Pour installer les  
panneaux, procédez comme suit :  
1. Assurez-vous de ne pas avoir oublié d’outils ou de pièces démontées dans le système.  
2. Assurez-vous que les câbles, les cartes d’extension et les autres composants sont bien  
installés.  
3. Revissez solidement les panneaux du boîtier avec les vis retirées plus tôt.  
4. Rebranchez tous les cordons d’alimentation c. a. et câbles externes au système.  
suite  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Warnings  
AVERTISSEMENT: Français (suite)  
Le microprocesseur et le dissipateur de chaleur peuvent être chauds si le système a été  
sous tension. Faites également attention aux broches aiguës des cartes et aux bords  
tranchants du capot. Nous vous recommandons l'usage de gants de protection.  
Danger d'explosion si la batterie n'est pas remontée correctement. Remplacer uniquement  
avec une batterie du même type ou d'un type équivalent recommandé par le fabricant.  
Disposez des piles usées selon les instructions du fabricant.  
Le système a été conçu pour fonctionner dans un cadre de travail normal. L'emplacement  
choisi doit être :  
•
•
•
•
•
Propre et dépourvu de poussière en suspension (sauf la poussière normale).  
Bien aéré et loin des sources de chaleur, y compris du soleil direct.  
A l'abri des chocs et des sources de vibrations.  
Isolé de forts champs électromagnétiques géenérés par des appareils électriques.  
Dans les régions sujettes aux orages magnétiques il est recomandé de brancher votre  
système à un supresseur de surtension, et de débrancher toutes les lignes de  
télécommunications de votre modem durant un orage.  
•
•
Muni d'une prise murale correctement mise à la terre.  
Suffisamment spacieux pour vous permettre d'accéder aux câbles d'alimentation (ceux-  
ci étant le seul moyen de mettre le système hors tension).  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
WARNUNG: Deutsch  
Benutzer können am Netzgerät dieses Produkts keine Reparaturen vornehmen. Das  
Produkt enthält möglicherweise mehrere Netzgeräte. Wartungsarbeiten müssen von  
qualifizierten Technikern ausgeführt werden.  
Versuchen Sie nicht, das mitgelieferte Netzkabel zu ändern oder zu verwenden, wenn es  
sich nicht genau um den erforderlichen Typ handelt.  
Der Wechselstrom des Systems wird durch den Ein-/Aus-Schalter für Gleichstrom nicht  
ausgeschaltet. Ziehen Sie jedes Wechselstrom-Netzkabel aus der Steckdose bzw. dem  
Netzgerät, um den Stromanschluß des Systems zu unterbrechen.  
SICHERHEISMASSNAHMEN: Immer wenn Sie die Gehäuseabdeckung abnehmen um an  
das Systeminnere zu gelangen, sollten Sie folgende Schritte beachten:  
1. Schalten Sie alle an Ihr System angeschlossenen Peripheriegeräte aus.  
2. Schalten Sie das System mit dem Hauptschalter aus.  
3. Ziehen Sie den Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems aus der Steckdose.  
4. Auf der Rückseite des Systems beschriften und ziehen Sie alle Anschlußkabel von den  
I/O Anschlüssen oder Ports ab.  
5. Tragen Sie ein geerdetes Antistatik Gelenkband, um elektrostatische Ladungen (ESD)  
über blanke Metallstellen bei der Handhabung der Komponenten zu vermeiden.  
6. Schalten Sie das System niemals ohne ordnungsgemäß montiertes Gehäuse ein.  
Nachdem Sie die oben erwähnten ersten sechs SICHERHEITSSCHRITTE durchgeführt  
haben, können Sie die Abdeckung abnehmen, indem Sie:  
1. Entfernen Sie alle Schrauben der Gehäuseabdeckung.  
2. Nehmen Sie die Abdeckung ab.  
Zur ordnungsgemäßen Kühlung und Lüftung muß die Gehäuseabdeckung immer wieder vor  
dem Einschalten installiert werden. Ein Betrieb des Systems ohne angebrachte Abdeckung  
kann Ihrem System oder Teile darin beschädigen. Um die Abdeckung wieder anzubringen:  
1. Vergewissern Sie sich, daß Sie keine Werkzeuge oder Teile im Innern des Systems  
zurückgelassen haben.  
2. Überprüfen Sie alle Kabel, Zusatzkarten und andere Komponenten auf  
ordnungsgemäßen Sitz und Installation.  
3. Bringen Sie die Abdeckungen wieder am Gehäuse an, indem Sie die zuvor gelösten  
Schrauben wieder anbringen. Ziehen Sie diese gut an.  
4. Schließen Sie alle externen Kabel und den AC Stromanschlußstecker Ihres Systems  
wieder an.  
Fortsetzung  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Warnings  
WARNUNG: Deutsch (Fortsetzung)  
Der Mikroprozessor und der Kühler sind möglicherweise erhitzt, wenn das System in Betrieb  
ist. Außerdem können einige Platinen und Gehäuseteile scharfe Spitzen und Kanten  
aufweisen. Arbeiten an Platinen und Gehäuse sollten vorsichtig ausgeführt werden. Sie  
sollten Schutzhandschuhe tragen.  
Bei falschem Einsetzen einer neuen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr. Die Batterie darf  
nur durch denselben oder einen entsprechenden, vom Hersteller empfohlenen Batterietyp  
ersetzt werden. Entsorgen Sie verbrauchte Batterien den Anweisungen des Herstellers  
entsprechend.  
Das System wurde für den Betrieb in einer normalen Büroumgebung entwickelt. Der  
Standort sollte:  
•
•
sauber und staubfrei sein (Hausstaub ausgenommen);  
gut gelüftet und keinen Heizquellen ausgesetzt sein (einschließlich direkter  
Sonneneinstrahlung);  
•
•
keinen Erschütterungen ausgesetzt sein;  
keine starken, von elektrischen Geräten erzeugten elektromagnetischen Felder  
aufweisen;  
•
in Regionen, in denen elektrische Stürme auftreten, mit einem  
Überspannungsschutzgerät verbunden sein; während eines elektrischen Sturms sollte  
keine Verbindung der Telekommunikationsleitungen mit dem Modem bestehen;  
•
•
mit einer geerdeten Wechselstromsteckdose ausgerüstet sein;  
über ausreichend Platz verfügen, um Zugang zu den Netzkabeln zu gewährleisten, da  
der Stromanschluß des Produkts hauptsächlich über die Kabel unterbrochen wird.  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano  
Rivolgersi ad un tecnico specializzato per la riparazione dei componenti dell’alimentazione di  
questo prodotto. È possibile che il prodotto disponga di più fonti di alimentazione.  
Non modificare o utilizzare il cavo di alimentazione in c.a. fornito dal produttore, se non  
corrisponde esattamente al tipo richiesto.  
L’interruttore attivato/disattivato nel pannello anteriore non interrompe l’alimentazione in c.a.  
del sistema. Per interromperla, è necessario scollegare tutti i cavi di alimentazione in c.a.  
dalle prese a muro o dall’alimentazione di corrente.  
PASSI DI SICUREZZA: Qualora si rimuovano le coperture del telaio per accedere  
all’interno del sistema, seguire i seguenti passi:  
1. Spegnere tutti i dispositivi periferici collegati al sistema.  
2. Spegnere il sistema, usando il pulsante spento/acceso dell’interruttore del sistema.  
3. Togliere tutte le spine dei cavi del sistema dalle prese elettriche.  
4. Identificare e sconnettere tutti i cavi attaccati ai collegamenti I/O od alle prese installate  
sul retro del sistema.  
5. Qualora si tocchino i componenti, proteggersi dallo scarico elettrostatico (SES),  
portando un cinghia anti-statica da polso che è attaccata alla presa a terra del telaio del  
sistema – qualsiasi superficie non dipinta – .  
6. Non far operare il sistema quando il telaio è senza le coperture.  
Dopo aver seguito i sei passi di SICUREZZA sopracitati, togliere le coperture del telaio del  
sistema come seque:  
1. Togliere e mettere in un posto sicuro tutte le viti delle coperture.  
2. Togliere le coperture.  
Per il giusto flusso dell’aria e raffreddamento del sistema, rimettere sempre le coperture del  
telaio prima di riaccendere il sistema. Operare il sistema senza le coperture al loro proprio  
posto potrebbe danneggiare i componenti del sistema. Per rimettere le coperture del telaio:  
1. Controllare prima che non si siano lasciati degli attrezzi o dei componenti dentro il  
sistema.  
2. Controllare che i cavi, dei supporti aggiuntivi ed altri componenti siano stati installati  
appropriatamente.  
3. Attaccare le coperture al telaio con le viti tolte in precedenza e avvitarle strettamente.  
4. Ricollegare tutti i cavi esterni e le prolunghe AC del sistema.  
continua  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Warnings  
AVVERTENZA: Italiano (continua)  
Se il sistema è stato a lungo in funzione, il microprocessore e il dissipatore di calore  
potrebbero essere surriscaldati. Fare attenzione alla presenza di piedini appuntiti e parti  
taglienti sulle schede e sul telaio. È consigliabile l'uso di guanti di protezione.  
Esiste il pericolo di un esplosione se la pila non viene sostituita in modo corretto. Utilizzare  
solo pile uguali o di tipo equivalente a quelle consigliate dal produttore. Per disfarsi delle  
pile usate, seguire le istruzioni del produttore.  
Il sistema è progettato per funzionare in un ambiente di lavoro tipo. Scegliere una  
postazione che sia:  
•
Pulita e libera da particelle in sospensione (a parte la normale polvere presente  
nell'ambiente).  
•
•
•
•
Ben ventilata e lontana da fonti di calore, compresa la luce solare diretta.  
Al riparo da urti e lontana da fonti di vibrazione.  
Isolata dai forti campi magnetici prodotti da dispositivi elettrici.  
In aree soggette a temporali, è consigliabile collegare il sistema ad un limitatore di  
corrente. In caso di temporali, scollegare le linee di comunicazione dal modem.  
•
•
Dotata di una presa a muro correttamente installata.  
Dotata di spazio sufficiente ad accedere ai cavi di alimentazione, i quali rappresentano  
il mezzo principale di scollegamento del sistema.  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español  
El usuario debe abstenerse de manipular los componentes de la fuente de alimentación de  
este producto, cuya reparación debe dejarse exclusivamente en manos de personal técnico  
especializado. Puede que este producto disponga de más de una fuente de alimentación.  
No intente modificar ni usar el cable de alimentación de corriente alterna, si no corresponde  
exactamente con el tipo requerido.  
Nótese que el interruptor activado/desactivado en el panel frontal no desconecta la corriente  
alterna del sistema. Para desconectarla, deberá desenchufar todos los cables de corriente  
alterna de la pared o desconectar la fuente de alimentación.  
INSTRUCCIONES DE SEGURIDAD: Cuando extraiga la tapa del chasis para acceder al  
interior del sistema, siga las siguientes instrucciones:  
1. Apague todos los dispositivos periféricos conectados al sistema.  
2. Apague el sistema presionando el interruptor encendido/apagado.  
3. Desconecte todos los cables de alimentación CA del sistema o de las tomas de  
corriente alterna.  
4. Identifique y desconecte todos los cables enchufados a los conectores E/S o a los  
puertos situados en la parte posterior del sistema.  
5. Cuando manipule los componentes, es importante protegerse contra la descarga  
electrostática (ESD). Puede hacerlo si utiliza una muñequera antiestática sujetada a la  
toma de tierra del chasis — o a cualquier tipo de superficie de metal sin pintar.  
6. No ponga en marcha el sistema si se han extraído las tapas del chasis.  
Después de completar las seis instrucciones de SEGURIDAD mencionadas, ya puede  
extraer las tapas del sistema. Para ello:  
1. Extraiga y guarde todos los tornillos de las tapas.  
2. Extraiga las tapas.  
Para obtener un enfriamiento y un flujo de aire adecuados, reinstale siempre las tapas del  
chasis antes de poner en marcha el sistema. Si pone en funcionamiento el sistema sin las  
tapas bien colocadas puede dañar los componentes del sistema. Para instalar las tapas:  
1. Asegúrese primero de no haber dejado herramientas o componentes sueltos dentro del  
sistema.  
2. Compruebe que los cables, las placas adicionales y otros componentes se hayan  
instalado correctamente.  
3. Incorpore las tapas al chasis mediante los tornillos extraídos anteriormente,  
tensándolos firmemente.  
4. Conecte todos los cables externos y los cables de alimentación CA al sistema.  
continúa  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix C Warnings  
ADVERTENCIAS: Español (continúa)  
Si el sistema ha estado en funcionamiento, el microprocesador y el disipador de calor  
pueden estar aún calientes. También conviene tener en cuenta que en el chasis o en el  
tablero puede haber piezas cortantes o punzantes. Por ello, se recomienda precaución y el  
uso de guantes protectores.  
Existe peligro de explosión si la pila no se cambia de forma adecuada. Utilice solamente  
pilas iguales o del mismo tipo que las recomendadas por el fabricante del equipo. Para  
deshacerse de las pilas usadas, siga igualmente las instrucciones del fabricante.  
El sistema está diseñado para funcionar en un entorno de trabajo normal. Escoja un lugar:  
•
•
•
•
•
Limpio y libre de partículas en suspensión (salvo el polvo normal).  
Bien ventilado y alejado de fuentes de calor, incluida la luz solar directa.  
Alejado de fuentes de vibración.  
Aislado de campos electromagnéticos fuertes producidos por dispositivos eléctricos.  
En regiones con frecuentes tormentas eléctricas, se recomienda conectar su sistema a  
un eliminador de sobrevoltage y desconectar el módem de las líneas de  
telecomunicación durante las tormentas.  
•
•
Provisto de una toma de tierra correctamente instalada.  
Provisto de espacio suficiente como para acceder a los cables de alimentación, ya que  
éstos hacen de medio principal de desconexión del sistema.  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
White text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
replacing, 170  
slide rails, 170  
volume control, 24  
A
AC filter and cable  
reinstalling, 159  
removing, 158  
Certifications, 285, 286  
CFG files, 58  
Acoustic noise, 30  
Add-in boards, 146  
current limitations, 146  
installing, 146  
Connecting peripheral devices, 31  
Connectors on CPU baseboard  
I/O power section, 204, 229  
Connectors on I/O riser card  
keyboard and mouse ports, 213  
parallel port, 214  
ISA, 57, 146, 148  
installing, 148  
PCI, 57, 146, 148  
removing, 149  
serial ports, 213  
video port, 215  
Agency certification, 285, 286  
Connectors on memory module  
signal section, 244  
B
Connectors on peripheral bay blindmate board  
blind mate, 280  
Back panel, external connectors, 32  
Backplanes, peripheral bay, 183  
Battery  
diskette drive, 281  
IDE, 282  
power, 281  
Wide SCSI, 283  
handling cautions, 258  
replacing, 259  
Connectors on PHP I/O baseboard  
32-bit PCI, 205  
BIOS  
Setup utility, description, 43  
Setup utility, running, 43  
special recovery mode, 197  
updating, 195  
64-bit PCI, 206  
diskette drive port, 208  
F16 bus, 201  
front panel, 211  
I C, 211  
IDE port, 210  
ISA, 207  
legacy, 212  
Board management controller, 191  
Board set  
2
CPU baseboard, 17  
I/O baseboard, 17  
I/O riser card, 17  
USB port, 212  
memory module, 17  
voltages and currents, 253  
brown out feature, 249  
wide/fast 16-bit SCSI port, 209  
connectors, peripheral bay blindmate, 279  
Controllers  
board management, 191  
diskette drive, 20  
front panel, 191  
C
Cautions, 132, 137, 143, 146, 156  
CD-ROM drive  
hot-swap, 191  
activity LED, 24  
IDE, 190  
headphone jack, 24  
mounting screws, 170  
open/close button, 24  
removing, 168  
keyboard/mouse, 20  
Symbios 53C896 LVDS, 185  
video, 20, 187  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Controls and indicators  
CD-ROM drive, 24  
diskette drive, 24  
front panel, 24  
Diskette drive  
controller, 20  
ejector button, 24  
removing, 166  
status LEDs, hot-docking bays, 24  
Cooling and airflow, 119  
Cooling system, 18  
Covers  
replacing, 166  
Drive bay, 3.5-inch, 18  
Drive fault light, slow blinking, 106  
Drive indicators, SCSI  
drive active, 106  
drive failure, 106  
drive present, 106  
Drivers  
front bezel, removing, 121  
PCI hot-plug, removing, 123  
peripheral bay, removing, 120  
removable, 119  
top  
SCSI, installing, 37  
video, installing, 37  
Drives  
reinstalling, 123  
removing, 121  
CPU baseboard, 19  
component layout, 222  
DC to DC converters, 218  
features, 217  
CD-ROM, 168  
diskette, 165  
E
front side bus, 219  
terminator module, 219  
I/O connector  
EDO DRAM array, 234  
Electromagnetic compatibility, See EMC  
EMC  
power section, 204, 229  
I/O interface, 219  
jumpers, 220  
compatibility, 285  
notice of test and compliance,  
international, 286  
changing a setting, 221  
processors, 217  
reinstalling, 144  
Emergency Management Port  
FRU viewer, 88  
main console window, 82  
phonebook, 87  
removing, 144  
SEEPROM, 218  
requirements, 80  
server control operations, 84  
EMI, 18  
symmetric multiprocessor, 217  
CPU tray  
reinstalling, 140  
removing, 140  
Environmental specifications, 30  
Current, usage, 253  
Equipment log, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165,  
257, 287  
Error messages  
D
beep codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,  
276  
port 80h codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,  
275, 276  
DC to DC converters, 217, 218  
installing, 138  
removing, 138  
DIMMs  
POST error codes, 273  
installing, 240  
removing, 242  
ESD, 30, 146  
add-in boards, 146  
Expansion slots, 186  
16-bit ISA, 20  
32-bit PCI, 20  
64-bit PCI, 20  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
keyboard and mouse ports, 213  
parallel port, 214  
serial ports, 213  
F
fan  
failure LED, 98  
hot swapping, 98  
redundant, 98  
removing, 97  
video port, 215  
reinstalling, 150  
removing, 150  
I/O Tray  
replacing, 100  
reinstalling, 152  
removing, 152  
fan array housing  
reinstalling, 128  
removing, 128  
ICMB  
board  
reinstalling, 154  
removing, 154  
bus, 19, 31, 32  
Fans, 18, 98  
voltage settings, 278  
FCC, Class A, 286  
Features, server, 18, 19, 20  
Front bezel  
IDE  
controller, 190  
interface, 20  
reinstalling, 121  
removing, 121  
Indicators  
cooling fault LED (yellow), 24  
Front panel  
board, 19  
drive fault LED (yellow), 24  
front panel LCD, 24  
reinstalling, 143  
removing, 142  
controller, 191  
power fault LED (yellow), 24  
SCSI drive in recovery mode, 106  
SCSI drive status descriptions, 106  
Interconnect backplane, 20  
ISA, 17  
switches, 19, 34  
Front side bus, 219  
terminator module, 20, 219  
reinstalling, 135  
removing, 135  
add-in board, installing, 148  
bus master slot, 146  
FRUSDR load utility, when to run, 89  
expansion slot, 186  
H
J
Hard disk drive  
Jumpers  
hot swapping SCSI drive, 106  
installing in hot-docking bay, 104  
SCSI, 102  
boot option, 197  
CMOS, 194  
CPU baseboard, 220  
changing a setting, 221  
flash memory, 195  
password, 195  
hard drives, SCSI, hot-docking, 24  
Hot-docking bay, status indicators, 106  
Hot-swap controller, 191  
Hot-swapping, hard disk drives, 18  
K
I
Keyboard, connecting, 31  
Keyboard/mouse controller, 20  
I/O baseboard, 20  
reinstalling, 156  
removing, 156  
I/O riser card, 20, 192  
connectors, 20  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
PCI, 17  
bus master slots, 146  
video controller, 187  
PCI bus hot-plug covers  
reinstalling, 124  
L
LCD module  
reinstalling, 131  
removing, 131  
Lights  
peripheral bay backplane, 183  
peripheral bay blindmate board  
connectors  
CD-ROM drive, 24  
DC power, 24  
diskette drive, 24  
power supply, 266  
blind mate, 280  
diskette drive, 281  
IDE, 282  
M
power, 281  
Wide SCSI, 283  
Mass storage device  
Peripheral Bay Cover  
reinstalling, 120  
CD-ROM, 168  
diskette drive, 165  
Memory module, 19  
DIMMs, 233  
Peripheral devices  
connecting, 31  
floppy disk drive, 43  
keyboard, connecting, 31  
monitor, connecting, 31  
peripherial bay  
installing, 240  
removing, 242  
interleaving, 234  
reinstalling, 133  
removing, 132  
removing, 159  
peripherial bay backplane  
reinstalling, 161  
Memory module connector  
signal section, 244  
removing, 159, 160  
peripherial bay blind mate board  
reinstalling, 162  
Messages  
beep codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274, 275,  
276  
port 80h codes, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,  
275, 276  
POST error codes, 273  
removing, 162  
PHP I/O baseboard  
component layout, 200  
connectors  
midplane  
reinstalling, 158  
removing, 158  
32-bit PCI, 205  
64-bit PCI, 206  
diskette drive port, 208  
F16 bus, 201  
Monitor, connecting, 31  
front panel, 211  
I C, 211  
IDE port, 210  
ISA, 207  
O
2
Operating systems, 17  
OVL files, 57  
legacy, 212  
USB port, 212  
P
wide/fast 16-bit SCSI port, 209  
expansion slots, 185  
I/O riser card, 192  
IDE controller, 190  
ISA expansion slot, 186  
jumpers, 193  
Password  
administrative, 26  
protection, 26  
user, 26  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
PHP I/O baseboard (continued)  
boot option, 197  
S
Safety, compliance, 285  
flash memory, 195  
PCI expansion slots, 186  
PCI video controller, 187  
server management, 190  
Physical specifications, 30  
POST  
SCI files, 58  
SCSI  
hard disk drive, 102  
hot-swapping, 106  
indicator, drive in recovery mode, 106  
installing in hot-docking bay, 104  
status indicator LED locations, 107  
status indicators, 106  
description, 35, 41  
running, 35, 41  
Power cord, obtaining, 33  
Power requirements, 30  
Power supply, 18  
hot-docking backplane, 20  
hot-docking bays, 101  
installing drivers, 37  
configuration constraints, 110  
failure LED, 110  
fan, 18  
peripheral bay  
hard disk drives, 183  
peripheral bay backplane  
fault indicators, 183  
handles, 29  
hot swapping, 110  
input voltages, 252  
output voltage, 252  
redundant, 110  
removing, 109  
replacing, 112  
ID addresses, 184  
indicator LEDs, 183  
power control, 183  
temperature sensor, 183  
singled-ended devices, 102  
Security, 26  
safety interlock mechanism, 110  
warning, 110  
boot sequence control, 26  
boot without keyboard, 27  
diskette write protect, 27  
emergency management port, 27  
locked power and reset switches, 27  
password protection, 26  
secure boot mode, 26  
setup utility, 26  
system setup utility (SSU), 26  
video blanking, 27  
Power system, 18, 251  
Power usage  
calculating, 254  
worksheet, 254, 255  
power, brown out feature, 249  
Power-on self-test, 35, 41  
Processor, 19  
installing, 137  
removing, 137  
Server  
after unpacking, 31  
back panel, 32  
board set, 17  
R
Real-time clock, 258  
boot from CD, 36  
chassis, 18  
configuration settings, 43  
lithium battery, 258  
cooling and airflow, 119  
copy software to diskettes, 37  
dimensions and weight, 30  
features, 18, 19, 20  
install SCSI drivers, 37  
install video drivers, 37  
major components, 21  
management, 19, 190  
Recovery mode indicator, SCSI drive, 106  
Regulatory specifications  
declaration of manufacturer, 285  
electromagnetic compatibility, 285  
international notices, 286  
USA notice, 286  
safety compliance, 285  
RFI, 18  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AC450NX Rack Server System Product Guide  
Server (continued)  
on-site installation, 29  
won’t boot from CD, 38  
Setup utility, running, 43  
Specifications  
floppy drive light, 268  
hard drive light, 268  
initial system startup, 262  
new software, 263  
no characters on screen, 267  
operating system prompt, 265  
power distribution backplane, 269  
screen characters incorrect, 267  
server lights, 265  
server problems, 263  
checklist, 263  
specific problems  
corrective actions, 265  
power light, 266  
video display, 267  
environmental, 30  
physical, 30  
SSU, See system setup utility  
Status indicators  
drive activity LED (green), 24  
drive fault LED (yellow), 24  
drive power LED (green), 24  
SCSI drives, 106  
Supplies, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165, 257  
Switches  
DC power, 261, 262  
NMI, 24  
power, 24  
U
USB ports, 20, 185  
reset, 24, 261  
Utilities  
server power, 110  
system power, 33, 41, 121  
Symmetric multiprocessor, 217  
System setup utility, 31  
CFG files, 58  
BIOS setup, 43  
FRUSDR load utility, 89  
SCSISelect, 41  
V
customizing, 60  
defining an ISA card, 63  
exiting, 74  
launching a task, 60  
location, 57  
Video  
controller, 20, 187  
drivers, installing, 37  
standard VGA modes, 187  
OVL files, 57  
W
Warnings  
removing an ISA card, 64  
running, 59  
locally, 58  
remotely, 59  
SCI files, 58  
when to run, 57  
translations  
English, 290  
French, 292  
German, 294  
Italian, 296  
T
Spanish, 298  
vacant power supply bay, 110  
Weight of server, 29  
Tools, 97, 101, 109, 119, 127, 165, 257  
Troubleshooting  
additional procedures, 264  
application software, 269  
beep codes, 267, 270, 271, 272, 273, 274,  
275, 276  
X
XICMB, bus, 191, 214  
checklist, 262, 263  
cooling fans, 266  
DC power switch, 262  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Ingersoll Rand Power Screwdriver ES45T User Manual
Intel Server SRPL8 User Manual
Invacare Battery Charger IRC 1731 User Manual
Iomega TV Converter Box EP510 User Manual
JBL Speaker S36IIPM User Manual
JVC Stereo System CA MD70 User Manual
Kenmore Clothes Dryer 1109756 User Manual
Kenwood Car Video System DDX7047 User Manual
Keys Fitness Treadmill Alliance 855 User Manual
Kodak Film Camera CGP User Manual